Intro Proe 320

PTC Global Services
Introduction to
Pro/ENGINEER
Release 2001
T779-320-03
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -
Copyright
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
This Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced
to any form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means,
electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance.
User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of
such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this
documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license
agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and
any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or
reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the
prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND
CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS,
CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN,
Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,
Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec,
CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS,
DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,
Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK,
NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,
Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM -POST,
Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY,
Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK,
Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER,
Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT,
Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,
Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator,
PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment,
Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and
ICEM logo.

Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc.
Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a
registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of
Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX
is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3
are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc.
Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software
of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is
copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.
HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other
brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to
FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited
commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the
Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA
© 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United
States.
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T779-320-01 05/18/01 Initial Printing of Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
for Release 2001
T779-320-02 08/15/01 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001
T779-320-03 11/08/01 Revisions to Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER for Release 2001
Order Number DT-779-320-EN

Printed in U.S.A

3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
7+(35(&,6,21/($51,1*0(7+2'2/2*<
37&*OREDO6HUYLFHVLVGHGLFDWHGWRFRQWLQXDOO\SURYLGLQJWKHVWXGHQWZLWKDQHIIHFWLYH
FRPSUHKHQVLYHOHDUQLQJH[SHULHQFH7RZDUGWKLVJRDO37&GHYHORSHG3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
ZKLFKPDWFKHVWKHULJKWWUDLQLQJWRWKHULJKWSHRSOHDWWKHULJKWWLPHXVLQJWKHULJKW
PHWKRG
3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJLVEDVHGRQDWKUHHVWDJH/HDUQ²$VVHVV²,PSURYHPHWKRGRORJ\
6WDJH/($51
7KHVWXGHQWDWWHQGVD37&WUDLQLQJFRXUVHLQFOXGLQJDQ\
• ,QVWUXFWRUOHGWUDLQLQJFRXUVHDWD37&WUDLQLQJFHQWHU
• 2QVLWHWUDLQLQJFRXUVH
• &XVWRPL]HGWUDLQLQJFRXUVH
• :HEEDVHGWUDLQLQJ:%7FRXUVH
6WDJH$66(66
7KHLPSDFWRIDWUDLQLQJFRXUVHLVDVVHVVHGXVLQJWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU7KH
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVDZHEEDVHGVNLOOVDVVHVVPHQWDQGGHYHORSPHQWSODQQLQJ
WRRO,WLVGHVLJQHGWRGHOLYHULQIRUPDWLRQWKDWZLOOKHOSLPSURYHWKHVNLOOVDQGSURGXFWLYLW\
RIWKHVWXGHQW

3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
6WDJH,03529(
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUILQGLQJVHQDEOHFXVWRPHUVWRLGHQWLI\DUHDVIRU
LPSURYHPHQW7KHWUDLQLQJZL]DUGZLOOGLUHFWFXVWRPHUVWRWKHDSSURSULDWHFODVVEDVHGRQ
WKHLUMREUHVSRQVLELOLWLHV
&XVWRPHUVKDYHDFFHVVWRDUDQJHRIUHVRXUFHVWKDWLQFOXGH
• ,QWHUQDODQGH[WHUQDOXVHUJURXSV
• 37&WHFKQLFDOVXSSRUWUHVRXUFHV
• :HEEDVHGFRXUVHVDQGOHVVRQV
&217,18286,03529(0(17
7KH3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJPHWKRGRORJ\SURYLGHVDFRQWLQXRXVF\FOHRINQRZOHGJHH[SDQVLRQ
DQGLPSURYHPHQW

3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
35(&,6,21/($51,1*,17+(&/$665220
7KH/HDUQ²$VVHVV²,PSURYH3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJPHWKRGRORJ\LVDOVRLPSOHPHQWHGLQ
VHOHFWHG37&LQVWUXFWRUOHGFRXUVHV7KURXJKRXWWKHFODVVVWXGHQWVZLOOWDNH
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQWVWRHYDOXDWHWKHLURZQFRPSUHKHQVLRQ7KHJURXS
UHVXOWVDUHDOVRXVHGWRLGHQWLI\DUHDVIRUWKHLQVWUXFWRUWRUHYLHZZLWKWKHFODVVDVDZKROH
$WWKHHQGRIWKHFODVVHDFKVWXGHQWZLOOFRPSOHWHDQ(GXFDWLRQ&LUFXLWIRUP7KLV
(GXFDWLRQ&LUFXLWLVWKHVWXGHQW
VDFWLRQSODQLGHQWLI\LQJWRSLFVIRULPSURYHPHQWDVZHOO
DVWKHVWHSVWRWDNHLQRUGHUWRHQKDQFHWKHVNLOOVLQWKRVHDUHDV
7KHIROORZLQJSDJHVSURYLGHDVDPSOH(GXFDWLRQ&LUFXLWDFWLRQSODQDQGDEODQNDFWLRQ
SODQ,QVWUXFWLRQVIRUXVLQJWKH(GXFDWLRQ&LUFXLWDFWLRQSODQZLOOEHGLVFXVVHGLQWKH
FRXUVH

3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
('8&$7,21&,5&8,7(;$03/(
7KHIROORZLQJLVDQH[DPSOHRIDVWXGHQW
V(GXFDWLRQ&LUFXLWDWWKHHQGRIWKH,QWURGXFWLRQ
WR3UR(1*,1((5WUDLQLQJFODVV
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU([DP5HVXOWV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKHUHVXOWVRIWKH(YDOXDWRUH[DPVIRUWKLVFRXUVHWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKH
TXHVWLRQV,DQVZHUHGLQFRUUHFWO\DQGQHHGWRUHVHDUFKIXUWKHU
4XHVWLRQ ,PSURYH$FWLRQ
:HDNDQGVWURQJGLPHQVLRQV 3UDFWLFHFUHDWLQJVLPSOHIHDWXUHVZLWKWKHGHVLUHG
GLPHQVLRQLQJVFKHPH
:HE/HVVRQ'LPHQVLRQLQJ6FKHPH
'UDIW)HDWXUHV 6HHFROOHDJXHDWZRUNIRUDGYLFHDQGSURGXFW
H[DPSOHV
&RQILJXUDWLRQILOHRSWLRQV &RQVXOWFRPSDQ\XVHUJURXSIRUJXLGHOLQHV
&ODVV(YDOXDWLRQ)RUP7RSLFV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKHTXHVWLRQVRQWKHFODVV(YDOXDWLRQIRUPWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKHWRSLFV,
QHHGWRUHVHDUFKIXUWKHU
2EMHFWLYH ,PSURYH$FWLRQ
6HWWLQJXSWKHGHIDXOWYLHZRIDSDUW 3UDFWLFHRQVLPSOHSDUWVXVLQJGLIIHUHQW
VNHWFKLQJSODQHVDQGUHIHUHQFHSODQHV
&UHDWLQJVZHHSV :HE/HVVRQ6ZHSW)RUPV
5HVROYH0RGH &UHDWHVRPHVLPSOHPRGHOVDQGPDNHWKHPIDLO
5HVROYH0RGH :HEOHVVRQ5HVROYH0RGH
)XWXUH&RXUVHV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKH5ROH%DVHG7UDLQLQJJXLGHOLQHVWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKHFRXUVHV
UHFRPPHQGHGWRLPSURYHP\VNLOOVDQGHQKDQFHP\MRESHUIRUPDQFH
1H[W&RXUVHV 1H[W&RXUVHV
)XQGDPHQWDOVRI'HVLJQ
'HVLJQLQJZLWK6XUIDFHV

3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU([DP5HVXOWV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKHUHVXOWVRIWKH(YDOXDWRUH[DPVIRUWKLVFRXUVHWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKH
TXHVWLRQV,DQVZHUHGLQFRUUHFWO\DQGQHHGWRUHVHDUFKIXUWKHU
4XHVWLRQ ,PSURYH$FWLRQ
&ODVV(YDOXDWLRQ)RUP7RSLFV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKHTXHVWLRQVRQWKHFODVV(YDOXDWLRQIRUPWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKHWRSLFV,
QHHGWRUHVHDUFKIXUWKHU
2EMHFWLYH ,PSURYH$FWLRQ
)XWXUH&RXUVHV
$IWHUUHYLHZLQJWKH5ROH%DVHG7UDLQLQJJXLGHOLQHVWKHIROORZLQJOLVWVWKHFRXUVHV
UHFRPPHQGHGWRLPSURYHP\VNLOOVDQGHQKDQFHP\MRESHUIRUPDQFH
1H[W&RXUVHV 1H[W&RXUVHV

T r aining Agenda
Day 1 Day 4
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER Principles of Top-Down Design
The Pro/ENGINEER Interface Additional Datum Features and Skeletons
Pick-and-Place Features Layers and Suppression
Sketcher Basics Creating Surfaces with Freeform
Sketched Features
Day 2 Day 5
Default Datum Templates The Resolve Environment
Parent/Child Relationships Information Tools
Sweeps and Blends Configuring Pro/ENGINEER
Relations and Parameters Modeling Philosophy
Day 3
Appendix A: Review Questions
Behavioral Modeling Appendix B: Project Laboratory
Drawings and Drawing Templates Appendix C: Precision Learning
Duplication Features: Patterns and Copy Appendix D: PTC Help
Creating Assemblies Appendix E: Technical Support

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
The following is a list of telephone and fax numbers you may find useful:
Education Services Registration in North America

Tel: (888)-782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5553
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5650
License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5795
Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)
In addition, you can find the PTC home page on the World Wide Web can be found
at: http://www.ptc.com. The Web site contains the latest training schedules,
registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions, as
well as information on PTC, the Pro/ENGINEER product line, Consulting Services,
Customer Support, and Pro/PARTNERS.

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION TO PRO/ENGINEER 1-1

PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS ........................................................................1-2
Solid Modeling Benefits .................................................................................................................1-2
Designing Feature-based Models ..................................................................................................1-3
Designing with Parametric Features .............................................................................................1-4
Taking Advantage of Associativity...............................................................................................1-5
THE PRO/ENGINEER INTERFACE 2-1

ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE...........................................................................2-2
The Base Window............................................................................................................................2-2
Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus ..........................................................................2-2
Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the Toolbar.........................................................2-3
Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area........................................................................2-3
Viewing Information in the Message Area..................................................................................2-4
WORKING WITH MODELS.....................................................................................2-4
Working with Dialog Boxes...........................................................................................................2-5
Retrieving Models ............................................................................................................................2-6
Using the Model Tree......................................................................................................................2-7
Using the Menu Manager...............................................................................................................2-8
Obtaining Additional Information with Help ..............................................................................2-8
Retrieving Multiple Models ...........................................................................................................2-8
Working with Multiple Sub-Windows .........................................................................................2-8
Saving Changes ................................................................................................................................2-9
Closing Windows...........................................................................................................................2-10
Deleting Files ..................................................................................................................................2-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL................................................................................. 2-11
EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER Environment........................................................2-12
EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and Orientation......................................................2-15
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree.............................................................................2-18
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise..............................................................................................2-21
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 2-25

PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES 3-1
DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES ............................................................ 3-2
Generic Method of Creation........................................................................................................... 3-2
Shell Features ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Creating Edge Chamfers................................................................................................................. 3-3
Creating Simple Rounds................................................................................................................. 3-3
Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds ........................................................................... 3-5
Hole Features.................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Creating the Straight Hole Feature................................................................................................ 3-6
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................3-10
EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features.............................................................. 3-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds ....................................................................... 3-14
EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature ................................................................ 3-21
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise............................................................................................. 3-29
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................3-31
SKETCHER BASICS 4-1

THE SKETCHER INTERFACE ................................................................................ 4-2
The Intent Manager......................................................................................................................... 4-3
Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus................................................................................ 4-3
THE SKETCHER MODE.......................................................................................... 4-4
Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus.............................................................................. 4-4
Specifying References .................................................................................................................... 4-5
Creating Geometry........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Dimensioning Sketches .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Adding Constraints.......................................................................................................................... 4-9
Other Sketcher Tools ....................................................................................................................... 4-9
Setting Sketcher Preferences ....................................................................................................... 4-13
TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE ....................................................4-14
Goal.................................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Method............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Tools ................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics ................................................................................................. 4-18
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps .............................................................................................. 4-24
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon.......................................................................................... 4-31
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................4-34
SKETCHED FEATURES 5-1

DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES........................................................................ 5-2
Sketching Cuts and Protrusions.....................................................................................................5-2
USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS .............................................................................5-5
Dimensioning Sections ...................................................................................................................5-5
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut ......................................................................................................5-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion..........................................................................................5-20
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 5-24
DEFAULT DATUM TEMPLATES 6-1

USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES .....................................................6-2
Base Features ....................................................................................................................................6-2
Defining a Datum Plane..................................................................................................................6-2
Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature ................................................................................6-2
Creating Datum Planes....................................................................................................................6-3
Creating Internal Datum Planes.....................................................................................................6-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL...................................................................................6-4
EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part ..............................................................................................6-5
EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane ....................................................................6-11
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 6-15
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS 7-1

PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER.........................................7-2
Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships ..................................................................7-2
Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships.............................................................................7-2
EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute..........................................................................................7-9
EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine......................................................................................7-14
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 7-20
SWEEPS AND BLENDS 8-1

SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES.................................................................................8-2
Creating Sweeps and Trajectories .................................................................................................8-2
Creating Parallel Blends .................................................................................................................8-3
EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features ........................................................................8-8
EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion...................................................................8-14
MODULE SUMMARY ........................................................................................... 8-17

RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS 9-1
RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS.......................................................................... 9-2
Parametric Relations ....................................................................................................................... 9-2
Representing Relations: Types and Symbols .............................................................................. 9-4
Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations ................................................................... 9-4
Order of Relations ........................................................................................................................... 9-6
Design Changes ............................................................................................................................... 9-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .................................................................................. 9-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations .............................................................................................. 9-10
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for Feature-Control........................................................ 9-15
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................9-18
BEHAVIORAL MODELING 10-1

BEHAVIORAL MODELING...................................................................................10-2
Behavioral Modeling Features..................................................................................................... 10-2
USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER .........................................................................10-4
Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components ........................................................................ 10-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ...............................................................................10-13
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to Measure Mass Properties ............10-14
EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup.....................................................................10-20
EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization..................................................................................10-26
MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................................................10-36
DRAWINGS AND DRAWING TEMPLATES 11-1

DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS...............................................................................11-2
Creating a Drawing........................................................................................................................ 11-2
Adding Drawing Views ................................................................................................................ 11-2
Types of Views............................................................................................................................... 11-2
Using the View Type Menu......................................................................................................... 11-3
Adding a Cross-section................................................................................................................. 11-4
Manipulating Views ...................................................................................................................... 11-5
DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES .....................................................................11-6
DETAILING THE DRAWING.................................................................................11-7
Creating Feature Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 11-8
Creating Driven Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 11-8
Manipulating Dimensions............................................................................................................ 11-8
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing...........................................................................................11-11
EXERCISE 2: Modifying Created Views and Testing for Associativity ..........................11-17
EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing....................................................................11-20

MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 11-24
DUPLICATING FEATURES: PATTERNS AND COPY 12-1

CREATING PATTERNS......................................................................................... 12-2
Patterning Benefits.........................................................................................................................12-2
Pattern Types ..................................................................................................................................12-2
Pattern Options...............................................................................................................................12-3
COPYING FEATURES ........................................................................................... 12-7
Specifying Copy-To Locations....................................................................................................12-8
Copying Methods...........................................................................................................................12-8
Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies .................................................................................12-9
Choosing Features to Copy ........................................................................................................12-10
Specifying Dependency Options ...............................................................................................12-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL............................................................................... 12-12
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension Pattern..............................................12-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern ...........................................................................12-15
EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of Sketched Features .....................................12-18
EXERCISE 4: Copying Features ..............................................................................................12-22
EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column .........................................................................12-24
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 12-28
CREATING ASSEMBLIES 13-1

OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................... 13-2
The Surface Normal Vector..........................................................................................................13-2
Constraining Component Parts ....................................................................................................13-3
Placing Components......................................................................................................................13-6
Packaging Under-Constrained Components .............................................................................13-7
MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES................................................................................... 13-7
Modifying Your Design Intent ....................................................................................................13-8
OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS.............................................................................. 13-8
Generating Bills of Material.........................................................................................................13-8
Creating Exploded Views .............................................................................................................13-9
EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts ............................................................13-11
Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly ..............................................................................13-18
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 13-22
PRINCIPLES OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN 14-1

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 14-2

Definition......................................................................................................................................... 14-2
Stages of Top-Down Design........................................................................................................ 14-2
The Approach................................................................................................................................. 14-2
Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional Approaches .................................................... 14-3
Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology ........................................................................... 14-4
THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN..............................................................14-4
Step 1 - Defining Design Intent................................................................................................... 14-5
Step 2 - Defining Preliminary Product Structure ..................................................................... 14-5
Step 3 - Skeleton Models ............................................................................................................. 14-5
Step 4 - Communicating Design Intent...................................................................................... 14-6
Step 5 - Continued Population of the Assembly....................................................................... 14-6
Step 6 - Managing Part Interdependencies................................................................................ 14-6
PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS .....................................................14-7
Layouts ............................................................................................................................................ 14-7
Skeletons......................................................................................................................................... 14-8
Data Sharing Features .................................................................................................................14-10
Managing References / Interdependencies..............................................................................14-12
MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................................................14-15
ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES AND SKELETONS 15-1

ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES.......................................................................15-2
Datum Axes .................................................................................................................................... 15-2
Datum Curves................................................................................................................................. 15-2
Datum Points .................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Datum Coordinate Systems .......................................................................................................... 15-4
EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features............................................................... 15-6
EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton ................................................................................ 15-9
EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly .................................................................15-14
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip .............................................................................15-16
MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................................................15-19
LAYERS AND SUPPRESSION 16-1

DEFINING LAYERS...............................................................................................16-2
Functionality................................................................................................................................... 16-2
Working With Layers.................................................................................................................... 16-2
CREATING LAYERS..............................................................................................16-3
Selecting the Object....................................................................................................................... 16-3
Creating Layers .............................................................................................................................. 16-4
Associating Items to a Layer........................................................................................................ 16-4

Setting the Display Status of a Layer..........................................................................................16-5
Manipulating Layer Display Status ............................................................................................16-7
SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY ........................................................................ 16-8
Using Suppression .........................................................................................................................16-8
Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships....................................................................................16-9
Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features ..............................................................................16-9
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode..............................................................................16-11
EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode ...................................................................16-14
EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode................................................................................16-20
EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in Assembly Mode..............................................16-22
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 16-26
CREATING SURFACES WITH FREEFORM 17-1

DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES.................................................... 17-2
THE STYLE FEATURE.......................................................................................... 17-2
HYBRID MODELING ............................................................................................ 17-3
CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX..................................................................... 17-4
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves ......................................................................................................17-4
Using COS.......................................................................................................................................17-6
Creating Styling Models ...............................................................................................................17-6
Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric Controls ............................................................17-7
Creating Blends and Transitions .................................................................................................17-8
Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models ......................................................................17-8
Reverse Styling...............................................................................................................................17-9
CREATING STYLE SURFACES............................................................................. 17-9
EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface.................................................................17-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight...............................................................17-16
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 17-23
THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT 18-1

REGENERATION FAILURES ................................................................................ 18-2
Starting the Resolve Environment...............................................................................................18-2
Resolving Regeneration Failures.................................................................................................18-2
EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure.....................................................................18-6
MODULE SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 18-10

INFORMATION TOOLS 19-1
MODEL INFORMATION........................................................................................19-2
Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature....................................................................... 19-2
Obtaining Regeneration Information.......................................................................................... 19-2
Accessing Information about Part Features .............................................................................. 19-2
Obtaining Information about Assemblies .................................................................................. 19-3
MEASUREMENT, INTERFERENCE, AND MASS PROPERTIES ...........................19-3
Calculating Mass Properties ........................................................................................................ 19-3
EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools .................................................................................... 19-5
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................19-9
CONFIGURING PRO/ENGINEER 20-1

CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER...........................................................................20-2
Defining Configuration Files ....................................................................................................... 20-2
Creating Mapkeys.......................................................................................................................... 20-4
CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR.........................................................................20-5
Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars ............................................................................................. 20-5
Creating Pull-down Menus .......................................................................................................... 20-6
THE MODEL TREE ................................................................................................20-7
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File......................................................................20-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey............................................................................................20-16
MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................................................20-19
MODELING PHILOSOPHY 21-1

DESIGN INTENT....................................................................................................21-2
Recording Your Design Criteria.................................................................................................. 21-3
Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool............................................................................ 21-3
Creating Parent/Child Relationships.......................................................................................... 21-3
Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity ......................................................................... 21-4
Changing Design Intent................................................................................................................ 21-5
Part I: Part Level Design Intent................................................................................................... 21-6
Part II: Assembly level Design Intent ......................................................................................21-10
Decision Process Questionnaire ................................................................................................21-10
MODULE SUMMARY ..........................................................................................21-13

REVIEW QUESTIONS A-1
DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................A-2
DAY 2: REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................A-6
DAY 3: REVIEW QUESTIONS.............................................................................. A-10
PROJECT LABORATORY B-1

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... B-2
PART CREATION ................................................................................................... B-3
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part ......................................................................................... B-3
SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part......................................................................... B-5
SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part .................................................................................. B-9
SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part .......................................................................B-11
CREATING ASSEMBLIES .................................................................................... B-18
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly.............................................................................B-18
SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor Housing........................................................B-22
SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly...........................................................................B-23
SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing.......................................................................B-26
INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS..................................................................... B-29
SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part.....................................................................................B-30
SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part..................................................................................B-34
SECTION 3: Completing the Blower Assembly .....................................................................B-36
SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly .......................................................................B-40
COMPLETING THE PROJECT.............................................................................. B-43
SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part ..................................................................................B-43
SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing.............................................................................B-45
SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing .....................................................................................B-47
USING THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR C-1

TECHNOLOGY-BASED LEARNING @ PTC.......................................................... C-2
TBLS: Necessity and Advantages ................................................................................................ C-2
TBLS Components ......................................................................................................................... C-2
THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR ....................................................................... C-3
Measurable Training Outcomes.................................................................................................... C-3
A Powerful Planning Tool............................................................................................................. C-3
COMPLYING WITH EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYMENT
REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................... C-4
EXERCISE 1: Completing Evaluator Assessments .................................................................. C-5
MODULE SUMMARY ............................................................................................ C-8

USING PTC HELP D-1
PTC HELP OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... D-2
PTC Help Features.......................................................................................................................... D-2
USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP ................................................................................. D-2
Launching Help: Four Methods................................................................................................... D-2
PTC HELP MODULES............................................................................................ D-7
PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT E-1

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE ...............................................E-2
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS .............................................................E-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail..............................................................................E-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone.......................................................................E-3
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web...........................................................................E-3
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support ...........................................................................E-3
Routing Your Technical Support Calls ........................................................................................E-4
Technical Support Call Priorities ..................................................................................................E-5
Software Performance Report Priorities ......................................................................................E-5
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT ...............................................................E-5
ONLINE SERVICES.................................................................................................E-6
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ...............................................E-6
Terminology used by Technical Support.....................................................................................E-7
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION ...............................................................E-8
CONTACT INFORMATION ....................................................................................E-9
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services..........................................................E-9
Telephone........................................................................................................................................E-10
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ..................................................................................... E-14
INDEX I-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -Module
1
In this module you learn about the core Pro/ENGINEER features
and concepts.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Describe how to use Pro/ENGINEER as a solid modeling design

tool.
• Describe the three main Pro/ENGINEER design concepts.
Page 1-1
NOTES
PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS

You use Pro/ENGINEER to create solid models of your designs. The
three-dimensional work environment enables you to take advantage of:
• Feature-based modeling
• Associativity
• Parametric relationships
Solid Modeling Benefits

Solid modeling enjoys benefits not obtained in two-dimensional design:
• Solid models have volumes and surface areas.

• You can calculate mass properties directly from the geometry you
create.
• When you manipulate a solid model, the model itself remains a solid.
1. Wireframe 2. Hidden Lines

3. No Hidden Line 4. Solid Shade
Figure 1: Solid Model Display

P a g e 1- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Designing Feature-based Models

The models you create in Pro/ENGINEER are feature-based. This means
that the geometry of your part model is composed of one or more features.
A feature is the smallest building block in a part model.
Pro/ENGINEER enables you to build a model incrementally by adding

individual features one at a time. As you construct your model, you choose
your building blocks, as well as the order in which to create them.
Creating models in Pro/ENGINEER involves incorporating your “design

intent” into the model. Design intent is the reason for adding every feature.
For example, you add hole features to a model because the resulting part
must be assembled to another part, and the holes are needed for the
screws.
The following figure shows how a typical part can be designed by adding
one feature after another to a base model.
Base Feature Protrusion Added Blind Cut Added Chamfers Added
Thru-All Cuts and Holes Added Chamfer Added Rounds Added
Figure 2: Building Models Feature by Feature

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 1- 3
NOTES
Designing with Parametric Features

The designs you create in Pro/ENGINEER can be parametric. This means
that their dimensions are controlled by parameters, which are related
dimensions.
Parametric modeling has many advantages:
• Modifying dimensions can change model geometry.

• Designated features can be related to each other.
• Modifications to certain features propagate changes to other features.
• Parent/child relationships can be developed between features.
5 10
Figure 3: Protrusion and Hole Follow Side of Block

NOTES
Taking Advantage of Associativity

Pro/ENGINEER models usually consist of several parts, assemblies, and
drawings. All of these objects are fully associative.
This means that changes made at one level will propagate to all the levels.
For example, if you change dimensions on a drawing, the change will be
reflected in the associated part. The following figure shows associativity
between a part and an assembly.
Original shaft before

length modification Shaft associated to assembly
10
Modification of shaft length

Assembly automatically updates
Figure 4: Associativity

Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 1- 5
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Module
2
The Pro/ENGINEER Interface
In this module you learn how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface
to enhance your design sessions.
Objectives
• Describe how to use the Pro/ENGINEER interface.

• Describe the different Pro/ENGINEER file types.
• Retrieve, save, erase, and delete files in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Describe how to use the Model Tree and the Menu Manager.
• Describe the parametric, associative, and feature-based
characteristics of Pro/ENGINEER models.
P age 2-1
NOTES
ELEMENTS OF THE INTERFACE
Figure 1 Sample Model Display in Main Window
The Base Window

When you start Pro/ENGINEER, the base window opens on your desktop.
You create your designs in this window. This window has four main parts:
• Pull-down menu • Display area

• Toolbar • Message area
Accessing Commands with Pull-Down Menus

The following Pro/ENGINEER pull-down menu options are available in
all the different modes of the software:
• File – File manipulation commands

• Edit – Object manipulation and action commands
• View – Model display commands

NOTES
• Insert – Creates features like protrusions, cuts, holes, and rounds

• Analysis – Model, surface, curve, motion, and sensitivity and
optimization commands
• Info – Query and report commands
• Applications – Launch commands for other Pro/ENGINEER modules
• Utilities – Working environment customization commands
• Window – Window manipulation commands
• Help – Help commands
Accessing Frequently-used Commands with the

Toolbar
The Pro/ENGINEER toolbar contains icons for frequently used
commands. Toolbar buttons are provided as an alternative to menu
commands. You can customize you toolbar.
Figure 2: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar
Manipulating Your Designs in the Display Area

Pro/ENGINEER displays parts, assemblies, drawings, and models on the
screen in the display area. An object’s display depends on the current
environment settings. When you select the model on the screen, the
system distinguishes between an edge and a surface of the model by
highlighting them in two different colors.
Note:
Surfaces of models are valid in Pro/ENGINEER regardless of
the model display.

The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 3
NOTES
Viewing Information in the Message Area

The message area:
• Displays status information for every operation performed.

• Displays queries and hints to simplify the task you are working on.
• Prompts you for additional information (the text message is
accompanied by an optional audible signal).
• Displays icons that represent different kinds of information, such as
warnings or status prompts.
To view old messages, you can use the scrollbar located on the right.
Note:
When Pro/ENGINEER requires data input, it temporarily
disables all other functions until you enter the required data.
WORKING WITH MODELS

File Types
Every type of Pro/ENGINEER object has a different file extension.
Typical file extensions are described next..
• PRT – Part files allow you to create 3-D models consisting of many
features.
• ASM – Assembly files contain information on how 3-D parts and
assemblies are assembled together.
• DRW – Drawing files contain 2-D fully dimensioned drawings of parts
or assemblies.
• SEC – Sketch files contain 2-D non-associative sketches that can be
imported while in sketcher mode.
In addition, there is also a SKETCHER mode that allows you to create two-
dimensional sketches that are parametric.

NOTES
Note:
When you create new files and save them you do not have to
add the file extensions. The system automatically associates
the correct file extension to the file that you are saving.
Working with Dialog Boxes

Dialog boxes in Pro/ENGINEER are used for model manipulation, feature
creation, and saving. There are two kinds of dialog boxes: general and
model.
The General Dialog Box

A general dialog box performs general software environment functions
such as setting display options for the model. The following figure
represents some of the common elements in a regular dialog box.
Title
Tabs
Drop-down arrow
Check boxes
Text box
Command buttons
Figure 3: Example of a Dialog Box

NOTES
The Model Dialog Box

A model dialog box creates and modifies model geometry by prompting
you for required and optional elements from the user.
Required elements are modifiable properties of a Pro/ENGINEER feature

that must be specified to completely define a feature. Optional elements
are additional operations that you may perform; but they are not necessary
for completing the feature.
The following figure illustrates a model dialog box that defines a ROUND
feature.
Figure 4: A Model Dialog Box
The option buttons in a model dialog box are:
• Define – Defines and/or changes selected elements in the dialog box.

• Refs – Displays the external references of the current selected
element.
• Info – Generates a listing of the properties of the feature that you are
creating.
• OK – Completes the definition of the elements, creating the feature or
model entity.
• Cancel – Cancels the current feature or model entity.
• Preview – Checks geometry before completing the feature definition.
Retrieving Models
When you retrieve files into a working session by clicking File > Open ,
Pro/ENGINEER also opens up a model tree window and a menu manager
that allow you to create, manipulate, and modify model geometry.
NOTES
Using the Model Tree

The MODEL TREE presents the model structure feature by feature. You
can select features from the MODEL TREE for modification and deletion.
MODEL TREE icons indicate the corresponding item type and its current
status.
Figure 5: Model Tree with Added Parameters

NOTES
Using the Menu Manager

The MENU MANAGER displays a list of menus that you can use to create,
modify, and duplicate model geometry.
Using the MENU MANAGER, you drive along a certain path to complete a
task by making choices from menus. Each time you choose an option from
a submenu, Pro/ENGINEER opens another submenu until you have
finished making selections.
Obtaining Additional Information with Help

When you hold your mouse over any menu option, an on-line help
message displays on the bottom of the current active window. If you need
additional help, you can right-click [ ] the menu option and select G e t
Help from the pop-up menu.
Note:
The system administrator must install and setup the online
documentation for you to be able to access this functionality.
Retrieving Multiple Models

You can have multiple models in session at one time—each window
containing a model—making it possible to refer to one model while
working on another. However, Pro/ENGINEER only allows you to work
on one active window at a time.
Note:
To activate a window, you must click Window > Activate .
Working with Multiple Sub-Windows

If the main window currently contains a model, Pro/ENGINEER
automatically opens a new main window each time you open another
model. The new main window contains the same toolbars and message
area as the first main window.

NOTES
Figure 6: A New Window over the Main Window
Saving Changes
As you work on your design, is a good practice to save your file often. The
File > Save option creates a new version of the file with an incremental
version number.
To retrieve an old version, you must specify the version number in the
retrieval name. The All Versions option in the FILE OPEN dialog box
displays the version numbers of a file.

NOTES
Figure 7: Opening a Version of a Model
Closing Windows
To close a window, you use the Window > Close or the File > Close
Window options. However, this does not remove the model from the
current session of Pro/ENGINEER. The model still occupies RAM space
on the computer. If the model is no longer required, you erase it from
memory with the F i l e > Erase > Current option. You can erase all
models that are in session but not displayed in the active windows with the
Erase > Not Displayed option.
Deleting Files
The File > Delete option removes old versions of a model. The Delete >
All Versions option deletes all versions of the model from the system
memory, as well as from the hard drive.

P a g e 2- 1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you will get first-hand experience to see how
Pro/ENGINEER is a parametric, associative, and feature-based solid
modeler.
Method
In Exercise 1, you learn the Pro/ENGINEER environment.
In Exercise 2: you learn how to manipulate the size and orientation of the
model.
In Exercise 3, you learn how to interrogate the MODEL TREE.
In Exercise 4, you how to investigate the associativity between an

assembly component and an incomplete drawing.
Tools
Table 1: Pro/ENGINEER Toolbar Icons
Icons Description
Datum planes on/off
Shading
Wireframe display
Hidden line display

Zoom in
Zoom out
Refit
Orient view
Saved view list

File save

The Pro/ENGINEER Interface P a g e 2- 1 1
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using the Pro/ENGINEER

Environment
Task 1. Open the master assembly.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory .
2. Set the working directory to <user home directory> \

intro_proe_320 \ 02_interface.
3. Click [File open].
4. In the FILE OPEN dialog box, select Assembly for the TYPE drop-
down list. Only the assembly files become visible.
5. Select MASTER.ASM and click Preview >>> . This will show a

preview of the model before opening it.
6. Click [No hidden line] icon to see the graphical preview of the
assembly.
7. Click O p e n to open MASTER.ASM.
Figure 8: The Master Assembly
Task 2. Manipulate the display of the assembly.
1. Click Utilities > Environment .
2. In the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, clear the Datum Planes and

Datum Axes check boxes.

NOTES
3. Click Apply. Do not close the dialog box.
4. Select H i d d e n Line from the DISPLAY STYLE drop-down list.
5. Click Apply.
Task 3. Change the orientation of the assembly.
1. Select Isometric from the DEFAULT ORIENT drop-down list.
2. Click Apply.
3. Change the orientation back to Trimetric.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Figure 9: Hidden Line Display of Assembly
Task 4. Use the toolbar to manipulate the model.
1. Toggle the display of datum planes. Click the Datum Plane icon in
the toolbar on top of the screen. The datum planes reappear.
Datum planes on/off Datum coordinate

system on/off
Datum axes on/off

Datum points on/off
Figure 10: Datum Display Section of Toolbar

NOTES
2. Click [On/Off ] to turn off the datum planes.
3. Shade the model. Click [Shading] on the toolbar.
Wireframe No Hidden Line

display display
Hidden Line Shading display

display
Figure 11: Changing the Model Display
4. Click [Wireframe display] to revert back to the hidden line

display mode.
5. Click View > Shade to cosmetically shade the model.
Note:
Wireframe remains selected on the toolbar because the model
is only cosmetically shaded and is not switched to a shaded
display mode.
6. Click View > Repaint .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Manipulating Model Size and

Orientation
Task 1. Change the size and orientation of the model using the toolbar.
1. Click [Zoom in].
Refit
Zoom In
Orient the model
Repaint
Zoom Out Saved Views

Figure 12: Model Orientation Options
2. Select a location in the model. Then select a second location to

create a zoom box. The model zooms in.
3. Click [Zoom out].
4. Click [Refit] to resize the model.
Task 2. Orient the model so that the bracket faces front.
1. Click [Orient view].
2. The ORIENTATION dialog box opens with the Orient by

Reference already selected as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 13: Orientation Dialog Box
3. In OPTIONS, Reference 1 refers to what is parallel to the screen,

and Reference 2 refers to what orients that parallel reference.
4. Leave the default Front in the REFERENCE 1 drop-down list and

select the front surface of the bracket part as shown in the
following figure.
Select this
surface to face
front for
Reference 1.
Select this
surface as the top
for Reference 2.
Figure 14: Surface Selection for Orientation

NOTES
5. Select the other surface of the bracket part as Reference 2. The

model changes its orientation as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15: Model after Orientation
6. Select the SAVED VIEWS bar towards the bottom of the dialog
box. Type [SIDE] in the NAME text box.
7. Click Save to save the new orientation.
8. Click OK in the ORIENTATION dialog box.
Task 3. Change the model back to the default orientation.
1. Click . [Saved views list]. Toggle between the DEFAULT and

the saved SIDE views from the saved view list to observe the
model in two different orientations.
Tips & Techniques:

You can also manipulate the model orientation by using the
mouse buttons and <CTRL> key. The left mouse button zooms
the model, the middle spins it, and the right pans it.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Model Tree

Task 1. Modify dimensions of model using the MODEL TREE.
1. If the MODEL TREE is not active, click View > Model Tree to
view the model tree on the left.
2. Modify the offset value of the master shaft part. In the model tree,
right-click on the MASTER_SHAFT.PRT, and select Modify

from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the 76 dimension that appears.
4. In the message area, type [90] and press <ENTER>.
5. Click Done in the MODIFY menu of the MENU MANAGER.
6. Click Done/Return in the ASSEM MOD menu.
Task 2. Regenerate the assembly.
1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Regenerate .
2. In the PRT TO REGEN menu, click Automatic.
3. The shaft moves to its new location. The gear and crank parts
follow the shaft. This proves the parametric nature of the
assembly.
Task 3. Test the associativity by modifying length of the shaft part.
1. Click File > Open. Open MASTER_SHAFT.PRT.
2. Click > Default to see model in default view.
3. Click Modify in MENU MANAGER.
4. Select the shaft as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Select the shaft.
Select this dimension

to modify.
Figure 16: Modifying the Shaft
5. Select the 152 dimension.
6. Type [250] and press <ENTER>.
7. Click Regenerate in the PART menu.
8. Save the shaft model. Click [Save].
9. Accept the default name of MASTER_SHAFT.PRT.
Task 4. Check for associativity between the shaft and the assembly.
1. Close the SHAFT window. Click Window > Close .
2. Make the ASSEMBLY window active. Click Window > Activate .
3. Regenerate the assembly. From the MENU MANAGER, click

Regenerate > Automatic.
4. The regenerated assembly appears with modified shaft dimensions,

as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 17: Assembly after Modification and Regeneration
5. A modification made to a part automatically modifies the whole

assembly. This proves the associativity of Pro/ENGINEER.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise

Task 1. Investigate the associativity between an assembly component
and an incomplete drawing.
1. Open the drawing DRAW_CRANK2. DRW.
2. Turn on the datum planes if they are not on, then repaint the
screen.
3. Click Edit > Value .
4. Select the 60.50 dimension.
5. Type [90.5] as the new dimension.
Modify this
dimension
Figure 18: Crank2 Drawing
6. Click Regenerate from the DRAWING menu.
7. Click Model from the REGENERATE menu.
8. Save the drawing model. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>.
NOTES
9. Click File > Close Window .
10. Click Windows > Activate . This activates the assembly window.
Notice that the crank is updated in the assembly. This shows the
associativity between the part drawing and the assembly.
Task 2. Check for interference between the solid models of the

assembly.
1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis. The MODEL ANALYSIS dialog

box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19: Analyzing Global Interference
2. The default type is set to Assembly Mass Properties. Select

Global Interference from the TYPE drop-down list.

NOTES
3. Accept defaults and click Compute .
4. In the RESULTS window, the system indicates that two parts are
interfering. Use the arrow to toggle between the interfering part
models. This also highlights the volume of interference on the
screen.
5. Close the dialog box.
6. Click to save the ASSEMBLY model. Accept the default

name.
Task 3. Determine the results of closing the master assembly window.
1. Click Window > Close . Notice the BASE Pro/ENGINEER

window cannot be removed as indicated in the message area.
2. Open CRANK2.PRT, which is still in the memory. In the FILE

OPEN dialog box, click [In Session].
Figure 20: Using the IN SESSION Option

NOTES
3. Select CRANK2. PRT. Click O p e n. The system retrieves this model

from the system memory, not from the computer hard drive.
Task 4. Remove the master assembly models that are not displayed in a
window from the session memory.
1. Erase the models that are not displayed. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed.
2. A dialog box appears with all the selected models that are in
session highlighted. Click OK to complete the operation.
Task 5. Retrieve “in-session” models again to determine which ones

remain in session.
1. Click . Click . Note that only CRANK2.PRT is listed.
2. Click Cancel .
Task 6. Erase the crank model from system memory to conserve RAM.
1. Erase the current file. Click File > Erase > Current . Confirm the
operation.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned that:
• Pull-down menus, toolbars, the display area, and the message area are
the four important elements of the Pro/ENGINEER user interface.
• Models can be oriented and displayed on the screen in various ways.
• Pro/ENGINEER models such as parts, assemblies, and drawings
exhibit feature-based, parametric, and associative characteristics.
• Pro/ENGINEER automatically opens a new main window each time
you open an additional model, so that you can work with multiple
windows.
• Erasing models that are not in use will free up the system memory.

Module

3
Pick-and-Place Features
Certain Pro/ENGINEER features need not be built with great effort.
They are freely provided and can simply be utilized whenever
needed. These features are called Pick-and-Place features.
Objectives
• Identify and define the different types of Pick-and-Place features.

• Create, delete, and modify the three Pick-and-Place features.
• Navigate among the various options of the HOLE dialog box to
capture the intent of the hole element in the lab practical.
Page 3-1
NOTES
DEFINING PICK-AND-PLACE FEATURES

The Pick-and-Place features discussed in this module are:
• Shell
• Edge chamfer
• Edge round
• Hole
Generic Method of Creation

To create any of these Pick-and-Place features, you specify the appropriate
placement references on your model and provide the required dimensions.
Pro/ENGINEER places the feature on that location.
Note:
Pick-and-Place features behave parametrically with respect to
their placement references. That is, if the placement reference
moves, the feature also moves.
Choosing Hidden References Using Query Select

When you click Query Select and then select on a surface, a dialog box
appears with various reference options.
Shell Features
The Shell option removes a surface or surfaces from a solid and hollows
out the inside of the solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness.
Figure 1: The Shell Feature

NOTES
When Pro/ENGINEER makes a shell, all the features that were added to
the solid before you chose the Shell option are hollowed out. Therefore,
the order of feature creation is very important when considering the shell
feature.
Creating Edge Chamfers

An edge chamfer feature removes a flat section of material from a selected
edge or edges to create a beveled surface between the two original
surfaces common to the edges. The Pro/ENGINEER dimensioning
schemes for edge chamfers are shown in the following figure.
Figure 2: Edge Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes
Note:
When selecting circular edges for chamfers, Pro/ENGINEER
only highlights one half of the edge. Since the system places
the chamfer on the entire circular edge, you do not have to
select the other half of the edge.
Creating Simple Rounds

Round features create a rounded smooth transition between two adjacent
surfaces. An edge round smoothes the hard edges between adjacent
surfaces.

Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3- 3
NOTES
Pro/ENGINEER offers two types of rounds: simple and advanced. Simple

rounds employ the default round shape and transitions. Advanced rounds
employ user-defined round shapes and transitions.
Radius Options for Simple Edge Chain Rounds

• Constant – Assigns the same radius value to every selected edge.
• Variable – Specifies radii at every selected edge at the endpoints and,
optionally, at intermediate vertices along the edge being rounded.
Figure 3: Constant and Variable Radius Rounds
• Full Round – Creates a round that completely removes a model

surface.
Full Round
Figure 4: Full Round
Note:
Do not dimension other features to the edges or tangent edges
of round features. Round features make unstable parents.

NOTES
Tip:
You should create round features on your model as late in the
design process as possible.
Figure 5: Cut Feature Dimensioned to the Edge Round
Specifying Radius Values for Simple Rounds

• Enter – (default) Specifies a new radius value that does not appear in
the menu. Use the <ESC> key to select other radius type options.
• Select On Surf – Specifies a point on the adjacent surface that
determines the radius value.
• Thru Pnt/Vtx – Specifies a datum point, vertex, curve, or edge end
through which the radius of the round should pass.
• Default Values – Specifies a radius value as the system default value
or a previously entered radius value in the SEL VALUE menu.
Select on this Round created

surface. tangent
Original model
Figure 6: Using the Select On Surf Option

NOTES
Select this vertex.
Original Model
Figure 7: Using the Thru Pnt/Vtx Option
Hole Features
There are three types of Holes:
• Straight Holes
• Standard Holes
• Sketched Holes
This module primarily deals with the Straight Hole feature and its many
options.
Creating the Straight Hole Feature

Pro/ENGINEER creates all straight holes with a constant diameter. The
hole feature always removes material from your model.
Placement Options
To place a hole on your model, you can choose from the following options
in the PLACEMENT menu.
• Linear – Places the hole on a plane. Dimensions the center of the hole
from two surfaces or edges using linear dimensions.

NOTES
Figure 8: Linear Hole
• Radial – Places the hole with respect to an axis using polar dimensions
on a plane, cylinder, or cone. Radial holes placed on a plane have a
diameter, radius, or linear dimensioning scheme.
Figure 9: Radial Holes on a Plane
• Coaxial – Places the hole co-axially using an existing axis. Does not
create placement dimensions, but creates only a diameter dimension
for the hole itself.
Figure 10: Coaxial Hole

NOTES
• On Point – Places the center of the hole directly on an on surface

datum point. The axis of the hole is normal to the placement surface.
Figure 11: On Point Hole
Depth Options
You can also create the hole from either side of the placement plane or
from both sides using the Depth One and Depth Two options in the HOLE
dialog box.
Figure 12: Side Options
The system determines how deep to create the hole based on your depth
specification. The following figure illustrates the various depth options
listed in the HOLE dialog box.

NOTES
Thru All
Variable To Reference
Thru Next
Thru Until
Figure 13: Hole Depth Options

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory, you will learn how to create and implement the
important Pick-and-Place features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you add a shell feature and a simple tangent chain round
feature to a base model by using the automatic round creation
functionality.
In Exercise 2, you add chamfers and rounds to a model.
In Exercise 3, you explore the straight hole feature and its many options.
In Exercise 4, you create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Pick-and-Place Features
Icons Description
Shading
Hidden line display
Repeat feature
Select geometric entities

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Shell and Automatic Round Features
Figure 14: The Start Model
Task 1. Create a shell feature.

intro_proe_320 \ 03_pick_place.
3. Retrieve the AUTOMATIC.PRT from the working directory.
4. Click Insert > Shell .
5. Select the front surface of the part as shown in the following

figure.
Select the
front surface
Figure 15: Selecting the Shell Reference
6. After the surface has been selected, click Done Sel > Done Refs.
Pick-and-Place Features P a g e 3- 1 1
NOTES
7. Enter [0.25] as the shell thickness and press <ENTER>.
8. Click OK from the SHELL dialog box to complete the shell

feature.
Figure 16: Completed Shell
Task 2. Add an automatic round feature using the right mouse button.
1. Click [Select geometry] and select the outer arc-shaped edge as

pointed out in the following figure.
2. Click > Round Edges from the pop-up menu.
Select the outer

arc-shaped edge
Figure 17: Selecting the Round Edges
3. Click on the green icons on the round feature and drag it

dynamically to modify the size of the round. Click the left mouse
button anywhere on the screen to complete the round creation.
4. Notice that the system automatically selected the edges that were
tangent to the arc-shaped edge to create the simple round feature.
NOTES
Tangent edges
were selected
automatically as
round references.
Figure 18: Completed Round
5. Click File > Save . Accept the default name and press <ENTER> to
save the model.
6. Click File > Close Window to close the current working window.
7. Erase all objects from memory. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed. Click OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Chamfers and Rounds
Task 1. Adding the 45 x d edge chamfer to a cylinder.
1. Retrieve the CHAMFERS.PRT from the working directory.
2. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.
3. Click 45 x d from the SCHEME menu.
4. Type [1.0] as the value for the chamfer dimension.
5. Select the two circular edges on either end of the cylindrical

protrusion as shown in the following figure. Selecting the edges
highlights them in blue.

NOTES
Select these
two circular
edges
Figure 20: Selecting the Circular Edges
6. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.
7. Click OK to complete the chamfer.
Figure 21: The Edge Chamfer Dialog Box
8. The completed chamfer is shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 22: Completed Chamfer
Task 2. Add the d1 X d2 chamfer to the four edges at the bottom of the
model.
1. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer.
2. Select d1 x d2 from the SCHEME menu. Type [1] as the value for
d1 and [2] as the value for the d2 dimension.
3. Switch to a H i d d e n Line view by clicking [Hidden line] in the

Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
4. Click Query Sel , then select the hidden bottom surface as the
reference surface for the d1 dimension.
Select the hidden

bottom surface.
Figure 23: Selecting the Bottom Surface
5. Select the front edge and right side edge as edge references.
6. Click Query Sel , then select the two hidden bottom edges.
NOTES
Note:
Make sure to click Accept from the query bin after picking
each edge when using Query Sel.
Select these two

hidden bottom
edges.
Select front
and right
side edges
Figure 24: Selecting the Hidden Edges
7. Click Done Sel > Done Refs.
8. Click OK to complete the chamfer.
9. Click [Shading] to see the shaded model.
Figure 25: Completed Chamfer

NOTES
Task 3. Create a simple round with a variable radius value.
Figure 26: Simple Edge Round with Variable Radius
1. Click Insert >Round > Simple > Done .
2. Click Variable > Edge Chain > Done .
3. Switch to the hidden line display by clicking [Hidden line]
4. Click One By One in the CHAIN menu to define the single edge
references one by one.
5. Select the three visible vertical edges of the base and the invisible
edge as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Select the fourth Select these

(hidden) edge here. three edges
Figure 27: Selecting the Variable Round References
6. To select the hidden vertical edge, click Query Sel and click
Accept in the Query bin.
7. The system highlights eight vertices.
8. Click Done in the CHAIN menu.
9. The system now highlights eight vertices. Click Done once again.
Task 4. Define radius values for the variable edge round, keeping track
of the vertices that Pro/ENGINEER highlights.
1. As the system highlights each end of every edge in green, type [0]
as a value for the top of the edge; type [2] as a value for the bottom
of the edge. Repeat for all four edges.
2. Click OK to complete the round feature.
3. Click [Shading].

NOTES
Figure 28: Completed Round
5. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Exploring the Straight Hole Feature

Four cooling fins
Base feature
270-degree
flange
Fluid pipe
Task 1. Create a linear placed hole with a variable depth of 30 on the

top of the base feature of the model shown in the preceding figure.
1. Open STRAIGHT_HOLES.PRT. Change display to Hidden Line

from the toolbar.
2. Click Insert > Hole . The HOLE dialog box appears, shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Figure 30: Hole Dialog Box
3. Leave the default hole type as Straight .
4. Type [7.5] as the diameter value . Press <ENTER>.
5. Leave the depth one default as Variable and depth two as None .
6. Type [30] as the depth value . Press <ENTER>.
7. The Primary Reference defines hole location. Click the top

surface of the base feature as the placement plane as shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
First dimension
reference (hidden
side surface)
Placement plane for

Primary Reference
Second dimension
reference
Figure 31: Creating a Linear Placed Hole
8. For the first linear reference, click Query Sel to select the hidden
side of the base feature. Type [10] as the distance for this reference.
Press <ENTER>.
9. For the second linear reference again click Query Sel once again and
select the visible front surface. Type [15] for the distance from this
reference. Press <ENTER>.
10. Click .
Figure 32: The First Completed Hole

NOTES
Task 2. Add a linear hole that runs through the cooling fins.
1. Click Insert> Hole .
2. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default hole type as Straight .
3. Type [12.5] for the hole diameter. Press <ENTER>.
4. Click Thru All as the DEPTH ONE option and None as DEPTH
TWO.
5. Select the top surface of the first cooling fin near the right back
corner as the placement plane, as shown in the following figure.
Second dimension
First dimension
reference (visible
reference (hidden
thin surface of fin)
back surface)
Placement plane
Figure 33: Creating the Second Straight Hole Feature
6. For the first linear reference, click Query Sel and then select the
hidden back surface of the base feature.
7. Type [10] as the distance for this reference. Then press <ENTER>.
8. For the second reference, click Query Sel and select the side
surface (not the edge) of the top cooling fin. If selecting the side
surface of the fin is difficult zoom in the model.
9. Type [10] for the distance for the second reference. Then press
<ENTER>.
10. You may preview the hole feature but do not close the HOLE
dialog box.

NOTES
Note:
You will be creating another hole feature. You may use the
repeat button in the HOLE dialog box.
Figure 34: The Second Hole Placed
Task 3. Use the TO REFERENCE depth option to create another linear

hole through the top three fins.
1. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default Straight hole type. Type
[12.5] as the diameter. Press <ENTER>.
2. Click To Reference in the Depth One option dropdown menu.
3. Click Query Sel , then select the bottom surface of the third fin. By
this, you are specifying that the hole has to end at the bottom
surface of the third fin.

NOTES
Select the hidden

underside
surface
Figure 35: The To Reference Hole
4. For the Primary Reference, select the top surface of the first fin as
shown in the following figure.
Select this
surface as the
placement plane
Second
dimensional
reference
First
dimensional
reference
Figure 36: Creating the Third Hole
5. For the first Linear Reference, select the front part of the base
feature and type [10] for the distance. Press <ENTER>.
6. For the second Linear Reference, select the visible side surface of
the cooling fin. Type [10] for the distance.
7. Complete hole feature.

NOTES
Task 4. Create a coaxial hole to the cylindrical feature.
1. Click Insert > Hole
2. In the HOLE dialog box, leave the default hole type as Straight .
3. Type [5] as a value for the hole diameter.
Axis line (A_3)
Depth surface
to extrude up to
Select here
for the
placement
pl ne
Figure 37: Creating a Coaxial Straight Hole
4. Make Depth One to be a To Reference . Click Query Sel and

select the visible front surface of the base feature as shown in the
preceding figure.
5. Select the front surface of the cylindrical protrusion as the primary

reference.
6. Select Coaxial from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list.
7. Select the A_3 axis of the cylindrical protrusion as the axial

reference. If you cannot see the axis, turn it on by clicking
[Datum axes on/off].
8. Click to complete the coaxial hole feature.

NOTES
Figure 38: The Completed Co-Axial Hole Feature

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Challenge Exercise

Task 1. Create a straight radial hole placed on a planar surface.
Figure 39: The Completed Model
1. Set the hole specifications.

Diameter = 15mm
Depth One = To Reference
Depth Two = None
Depth Reference = Invisible surface of the circular flange as
shown in the next figure.
2. Set the hole placement.

Primary Reference = Visible front surface of the circular flange
Placement Type = Radial
Axial Reference = A_3 of the fluid pipe
Distance = 25 mm
Angular Reference = Front face of the flange near the angled
cut.

4
Sketcher Basics
In this module you learn how to sketch and define complex parts.
You also learn how to use Pro/ENGINEER in Sketcher mode, and
how to take advantage of the Intent Manager to improve your
designs.
Objectives
• Start a design in Sketcher.

• Create various types of geometry.
• Constrain sketched entities.
• Modify section sketches.
P a ge 4-1
NOTES
THE SKETCHER INTERFACE

The Sketcher interface consists of:
• A menu bar with pull-down menus that include Sketcher-specific

menus EDIT and SKETCH.
• A standard Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
• An additional Sketcher toolbar with Sketcher-specific options.
• A message area below the toolbars.
• An INTENT MANAGER with fly-out icons on the right to perform
frequently used actions.
• An additional Sketcher-specific message area at the bottom left of the
window describing INTENT MANAGER’s fly-out icons.
Figure 1: Sketcher Interface

NOTES
Selecting Sketched Entities

Using the mouse, you can select individual or multiple-specific sketched
entities, or all entities that fall within a swept box. Selected entities
highlight in red.
The Intent Manager

The INTENT MANAGER appears automatically on the right side of the
screen when you enter the Sketcher mode. It includes fly-out icons which
are logically grouped together based on capability. These icons provide
access to the most frequently used sketching tools.
Default cursor to
pick entities
Icons to create
different kinds of
geometry
To create dimensions
To modify dimensions
To impose constraints
To trim Entities
Figure 2: INTENT MANAGER Flyout Icons
Accessing Commands with Pop-Up Menus

You access Pop-up menus by right-clicking in the SKETCHER display
area. These menus offer short-cuts for sketching, modifying,
dimensioning, deleting, and undoing steps.

Sketcher Basics P a g e 4- 3
NOTES
Figure 3: A Typical Sketcher Pop-Up Menu
THE SKETCHER MODE

Accessing Commands with Sketcher Menus
EDIT and SKETCH are top-level menus specific to the SKETCHER mode.
They contain all the commands needed in the sketching environment.
Figure 4: Edit Menu
The INTENT MANAGER commands and the T e x t option are also available
in the SKETCH menu.

NOTES
Figure 5: Sketch Menu
Specifying References
In the SKETCHER mode you specify the references of the section when
you:
• Create a new feature.

• Redefine a feature with missing or insufficient references.
• Provide references to place a section.
It is good practice to reference before sketching. This provides the

sketched entities a location to automatically align to and dimension from.
Note:
The references that you select for a section create Parent/Child
relationships.

NOTES
Creating Geometry
SKETCHER mode enables the creation of geometrical shapes and entities.
The basic ones—lines, arcs, and circles—are discussed below.
• Lines – Using the Line fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER, you
create two types of sketched lines:
Straight lines from point to point.
Centerlines for referencing or constraining entities.
Figure 6: Lines Fly-Out Icons
• Arcs – Using the Arcs fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER, you
create four types of arcs:
An arc by 3 points or tangent to an entity at its endpoint.
A concentric arc.
An arc by selecting its center and endpoints.
A conic arc.
Figure 7: Arcs Fly-Out Icons
• Circles – Using the Circle fly-out icons in the INTENT MANAGER,

you can create three types of circles:
A circle by selecting the center and a point on the circle.
A concentric circle.
A full ellipse.
Figure 8: Circle Fly-Out Icons

NOTES
Sketched circle
Concentric to this
edge
Figure 9: Sketching a Concentric Circle to an Edge
Dimensioning Sketches
Once a sketch is complete, you dimension it. An orderly arrangement of
dimensions helps visual clarity, particularly when the sketch gets complex.
To place dimensions in SKETCHER, you left-click to select the entity and

middle-click to place the dimension. You can place a dimension at any
point during or after sketching.
The following figure illustrates the simple dimensioning of a rectangle.
Figure 10: Creating Dimensions for a Rectangle

NOTES
Figure 11: Grabbing and Moving Dimensions
Modifying Dimensions
You can modify the dimensions values of a sketch in the MODIFY
DIMENSIONS dialog box. You also have the options to Regenerate and
Lock Scale the sketch.
You can also double-click on a specific dimension in a sketch to

dynamically change the value of the dimension. The SENSITIVITY
scrollbar allows you to adjust the sensitivity of the control wheels when
changing dimensions dynamically.
Figure 12: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box

NOTES
Adding Constraints
Sketcher applies system default constraints to a sketch to establish the
initial design intent. You can override the default constraints from the
CONSTRAINTS dialog box.
Figure 13: Sketcher Constraints Dialog Box
You can use the constraint options to:
1. Make a line or two vertices vertical.
2. Make two entities tangent.
3. Make two points or vertices symmetrical about a centerline.
4. Make a line or two vertices horizontal.
5. Place a point on the middle of the line.
6. Create equal lengths, equal radii, or same curvature constraint.
7. Make two entities perpendicular.
8. Creates same points or points on entities.
9. Make two lines parallel.
Other Sketcher Tools

Edge
The Edge tool has two instances represented by its two fly-out icons in the
Intent Manager, as shown below:

NOTES
Figure 14 Edge Fly-Out Icons
• Use Edge – Uses an existing model edge to create sketched entities.

Automatically selects the edge as a specified reference.
Figure 15: Using Existing Model Edge to Create Sketched Entities
• Offset Edge – Uses existing model edge to create sketched entities at

an offset distance.
Figure 16: Creating Sketched Entities at an Offset Distance
Note:
The Use Edge and Offset Edge options create parent/child
relationships with the referenced feature.
Copy
The Edit > Copy option copies 2-D drafts and imports entities from a
drawing. You can move and scale a section, making legacy data easier to
manipulate.

NOTES
Mirror
You can mirror sketched entities from one side of a centerline to the other
using the Edit > Mirror option.
Move
The MOVE ENTITY menu displays the following options:
• Drag Item – Moves an entity or its vertex to a new location.

• Drag Many – Translates selected entities within a sketch.
• Rotate90 – Rotates sketched entities about a specified point by
multiples of 90 degrees.
• Dimension – Repositions a dimension within a sketch.
Trim
The Edit > Trim option shortens or extends an entity in three different
ways corresponding to the three fly-out icons shown below:
Figure 17: Trim Fly-Out Icons
• The first dynamically trims section entities

• The second cuts or extends entities to other entities or geometry.
• The third divides an entity at the point of selection, replacing the
original with two new entities.
Replace
Replaces a sketched entity from the original section with a newly sketched
entity.
Section Analysis
The Analysis > Section Analysis option provides you with information
about:
• Intersection and tangency points.

• Angles and distances.
• Dimensioning references.

Sketcher Basics P a g e 4- 1 1
NOTES
• Entity curvature display.
Sketcher Points
Sketcher points force coincidence among sketched entities and allow
slanted dimensions between sketched entity end-points.
Figure 18: Midpoint Definition Using Sketcher Point
Figure 19 Defining Theoretical Sharps Using Sketcher Points

NOTES
Setting Sketcher Preferences

The SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box in the UTILITIES menu
modifies the Sketcher environment.
Figure 20 Sketcher Preferences Dialog Box
Use the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box to:
• Modify the display options of various sketcher entities.

• Set constraints preferences by enabling or disabling constraints
assumed by Sketcher.
• Set grid, grid spacing, and accuracy parameters.
• Click the Default button to reset the preferences.
Sketching in 3-Dimensions (3-D)

When you select the Use2D Sketcher option from the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box, Sketcher starts in a 2-D orientation (that is, with the sketching
plane parallel to the computer screen).
When you do not select this option, the Sketcher starts in a 3-D
orientation. You can change the view orientation at any time and sketch in

NOTES
3-D. Using View > Sketch View , you can re-orient a Sketcher section into
the 2-D view while in Sketcher mode.
Figure 21: The Environment Dialog Box
TAKING ADVANTAGE OF SKETCHER MODE

Your work sessions will be more productive if you apply the following
rules when working with Sketcher:

NOTES
1. Keep sketches simple.
This makes the final model flexible and helps regeneration.

2. Use the Undo option
The Undo option restores a sketched section to its prior state.

This is extremely useful when sketching features
incrementally.
3. Do not sketch to scale.

Concentrate on getting your geometry straight by sketching
large.
Resolve the sketch by modifying dimensions.
This rule is particularly helpful when the sketched entities are
small.
4. Use the grid.

Create lines equal, parallel, or perpendicular.
Align sketched entities.
Align centers horizontally and vertically.
5. Do not extend the sketch outside of the part.

There is no need to sketch sections that extend outside the part,
as is required with some solid modeling packages.
6. Make effective use of Sketcher's accuracy.

The range for the accuracy is 1.0 e-9 through 1.0 (default).
To prevent Sketcher from making constraints, you can increase
Sketcher accuracy by changing it from 1.0 to a lower number.
7. Use open and closed sections appropriately.

When sketching an open section, you cannot have more than
one open section per feature.
If you use an open section, you must explicitly align its open
ends to the part.
When in doubt over whether you should use an open or closed
section, you should use a closed one since it is easier to
regenerate, and is less prone to failure.

NOTES
Protrusion B
Protrusion A
Cut
Figure 22: Open and Closed Sections

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you practice the basic sketching procedures such as
entering sketcher mode, creating straight lines, creating arcs, applying
constraints, dimensioning, and generating solid models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you practice basic sketching procedures.
In Exercise 2, you create a snap ring by sketching in steps.
In Exercise 3, you create a hex section using construction entities.
Tools
Table 1: Sketcher Basic Tools
Icons Description
Impose sketcher constraints
Perpendicular constraint
Tangent arc
Create circle
Create rectangle
Create dimension
Dynamic trim
Modify dimension

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics
Figure 23 Completed Sketch after Exercise 1
Task 1. Create a new sketch named ROUND_RECTANGLE.
1. Click [File new] in the toolbar.
2. In the NEW dialog box, select Sketch .
3. Type [ROUND_RECTANGLE ] for the name and click OK .
4. Sketcher mode activates.
Task 2. Sketch four lines with a horizontal bottom line, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Click [Sketch line] and place by clicking .
2. Click to end line creation.

NOTES
Figure 24: Sketching a Quadrilateral
Task 3. Apply the constraint to make the lines perpendicular.
1. Click [Impose sketcher constraints], then click

[Perpendicular constraint], then select two lines to make them
perpendicular, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 25: Perpendicular Constraint on One Side
2. Select the other two lines to make them perpendicular.

NOTES
Figure 26: Perpendicular Constraint on the Other Side
3. Close the CONSTRAINTS dialog box.
Task 4. Delete the two vertical lines.
1. Click the P o i n t e r icon, and select the left vertical line.
2. Press and hold <SHIFT> and select the right vertical line.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
Task 5. Sketch a tangent end arc on the left side of the section.
1. Click [Tangent arc ].
2. Select and drag the top left vertex out of the left quadrant of the
circle to get a tangent end arc.
3. Select the end point to be the bottom left end point, as shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Figure 27 Sketching a Tangent End Arc
Task 6. Repeat the process on the right side of the section.
Figure 28 Sketching Tangent End Arcs on Both Sides
Task 7. Add the proper dimensions.
1. Click [Create dimension].
2. Select each arc, then middle-click to place the dimension.
3. Select Tangent > Accept and Horizontal > Accept for type and
orientation.

NOTES
Figure 29 Dimensioning the Arcs
Task 8. Create a diameter dimension on the left arc.
1. Select twice the left arc, and then to place it.
Figure 30 Dimensioning the Left Arc
Task 9. Modify both dimensions.
1. Click and select the horizontal and the diameter dimensions.

Press and hold <SHIFT> and click [Modify dimension].
2. Modify the diameter to [2 ] and the linear dim to [4].

NOTES
Figure 31: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
3. Click to complete the feature.
4. Save and close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box.
Figure 32: Sketch with Modified Dimensions

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps
Figure 33 Completed Snap Ring after Exercise 2
Task 1. Create a new sketch called SNAP_RING.
1. Click .
2. Select Sketch .
3. Type [SNAP_RING] as the name of the sketch.
Task 2. Create two offset circles aligned horizontally.
1. Click [Create circle] and draw two circles, as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 34 Two Offset Circles Aligned Horizontally
Task 3. Create a rectangle that snaps to the inside circle on both upper
vertices.
1. Click [Create rectangle]. Click in the Sketcher to start the

sketch, and then click again to end the sketch.
2. Then use the dynamic trim to create intersections. Click

[Dynamic trim]. Drag from below the bottom horizontal line and to
above the top horizontal line, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Stop cursor here
Delete
Start dynamic trim here
Figure 35 Sketching a Rectangle Inside Circles
3. Highlight each item. If all the crossed items are not highlighted,
continue to drag over the lines until they do highlight.
4. The result is shown in the following figure.
Figure 36 Using Dynamic Trim

NOTES
5. The results of trimming are shown in the following figure.
Figure 37: Section after Trimming
Task 4. Sketch another rectangle.
1. Snap to the outside circle and the bottom of the two vertical lines,
as shown in the following figure. Do not snap through any of the
arc's vertices.

NOTES
Figure 38: Sketching a Second Rectangle
Task 5. Use the dynamic trim to remove the final lines and arc.
1. Click to trim the unwanted entities.
2. The result is shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 39: Capturing Intent with Dynamic Trim
Task 6. Dimension the entities.
1. Click to create the dimensions.
2. Select each entity, and then middle-click to place the dimensions.

Refer to the preceding figure to determine the dimensioning
scheme (the format of the dimensions and not the actual value)
required for capturing design intent.
3. Click to modify the six dimension values.

NOTES
Figure 40: Modifying Dimensions
4. Save and close.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon

Task 1. Create a new sketch called HEX.
1. Click . Select Sketch and type [HEX] as the name.
Task 2. Create a sketcher point
1. Click the point button .
2. Place a point in the center of the screen.
Task 3. Add vertical centerlines passing through the sketcher point.
1. Click the centerline button .
2. Create a vertical centerline that passes through the point.
3. Create two additional centerlines that pass through the point at an

angle.
Task 4. Modify the angles to 60°.
1. Modify the angle between centerlines to 60°, as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 41: Modifying Angles between Centerlines

NOTES
Task 5. Create a circle centered on the Sketcher point.
1. Click to draw a circle.
2. and select Toggle Construction to convert it to a

construction circle.
Figure 42: Creating a Construction Circle
Task 6. Create a hexagon by sketching 6 lines from the intersection

points of the circle and the centerlines.
Figure 43: Creating a Hexagonal Sketch

NOTES
1. Add a diameter dimension to the construction circle and modify it's

value to [1.0]

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• The Sketcher interface consists of the main sketcher area, pull-down

menus, toolbars, message areas, the INTENT MANAGER with fly-out
icons and pop-up menus.
• Sketched geometry must be dimensioned and constrained.
• You can create lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, splines, and many other
geometrical entities using the Intent Manager.
• The EDIT and SKETCH menus contain most of the tools that are
unique to Sketcher mode such as Copy , Mirror , Move , and Trim .
• Default dimensions can be modified at any stage of model generation.
• The system notifies you when a model has conflicting constraints.
• Sketcher preferences can be set using the SKETCHER PREFERENCES
dialog box.

5
Sketched Features
In this module you learn how to create sketched features by defining
their size, shape, and location in a model.
Objectives
• Sketch cuts and protrusions.

• Created extruded and revolved forms.
• Set up sketching planes.
• Dimension sketched features.
Page 5-1
NOTES
DEFINING SKETCHED FEATURES

Sketching Cuts and Protrusions
• Protrusion – adds material to a model in any desired shape.
• Cut– removes material from an open or closed cross-section in a
model.
Figure 1: Protrusion versus Cut
Created Extruded and Revolved Forms

• Extrude – adds or removes material linearly from the sketching plane.
• Revolve –creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a
sketched centerline.

NOTES
Sketched
centerline
Figure 2: Extruded versus Revolved Features
Selecting a Sketching Plane

To create a new feature on a model, begin the sketch on the surface where
you intend to place the feature. The surface you choose defines the
sketching plane.
Selecting a Reference Plane

Once you create and dimension the sketch, then you orient the new feature
to a reference plane. The reference plane must be perpendicular to the
sketching plane.
Changing the Default Reference Plane

You can change the default orientation and manually select a new
reference plane.
The default orientation of the sketching plane orients it parallel to the

screen and chooses one of the default datums as a reference plane. For
example, you may want to manually select the top surface of the model for
a perpendicular reference orientation.

Sketched Features P a g e 5- 3
NOTES
Top orientation Direction of

plane feature creation
Sketching
plane
Sketcher Orientation -- Protrusion Sketcher Orientation -- Cut
Resulting Protrusion Resulting Cut
Figure 3: Two Features Defined by the Same Cross-section

NOTES
USING THE SKETCHER TOOLS

Whenever you create a sketch, Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes a
dimensioning scheme. Since all sketches are parametric, you can create
them in a convenient scale and later modify their dimensions.
In SKETCHER main window toolbar, the Sketch option pull-down menu

contains all the necessary sketching tools.
Another additional toolbar containing the sketching options and

constraints appears on the right side of the SKETCHER window.
Dimensioning Sections
To override weak dimensions with strong ones, you select the entity, then
middle-click [ ] to place the dimension at the desired location.
Completes or
aborts geometry
creation
Creates section Opens pop-up

entities by menu
selecting points
Figure 4: Sketcher Mouse Button Functions

NOTES
Linear Dimensions
Linear dimensions indicate the length of a line segment or the distance
between two entities. The different types of linear dimensions are
illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5: Linear Dimensions in Sketcher Mode
Note:
You cannot dimension the length of a centerline.

NOTES
Diameter Dimensions
Diameter dimensions measure the diameters of sketched circles and arcs.
To create a diameter dimension, select the arc or circle twice and to

place the dimension.
Select twice on the Place the dimension

circle
Figure 6: Diameter Dimension on Circle
To create a diameter dimension for a revolved section, Select the entity to

dimension and the centerline to use as the axis of revolution. Then select
the entity again and place the dimension.
Finally, place the diameter

dimension.
Third, select the

Second, sketched entity
select the once again.
sketched
centerline
First, select the
sketched entity
Figure 7: Diameter Dimension for Revolved Section in Sketcher Mode

NOTES
Note:
The diameter dimension for a revolved feature extends beyond
the centerline, indicating that it is a diameter dimension rather
than a radius dimension.
Radial Dimensions
Radial dimensions measure the radii of circles or arcs. To create a radial
dimension, select the circle or arc and place the dimension.
Select on the ARC (left)
Place dimension (middle)
Figure 8: Radial Dimension in Sketcher Mode

NOTES
Angular Dimensions
Create an angular dimension between lines by selecting two lines. to

place the dimension. Where you place the dimension determines how the
system measures the angle.
Select the two lines

in any order.
Place dimensions in indicated

positions.
Figure 9: Angular Dimensions in Sketcher Mode
To create an arc angle dimension, select one endpoint, then the other
endpoint, and finally the arc. to place the dimension.
Select 1 - endpoint
Select 2 -endpoint
Select 3 - on arc
Place dimension
Figure 10: Arc Angle Dimension in Sketcher Mode

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you add and remove material to a solid part using
protrusion and cut features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a cut feature.
In Exercise 2, you create a protrusion.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Sketched Features
Icons Description
Sketch centerline
Toggle grid on/off

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cut
Figure 11: Start and Finished Models
Task 1. Sketch a cut feature within a closed section.

intro_proe_320 \ 05_sketch_feat.
3. Open SKETCHED_FEATURES.PRT.
4. Change to Hidden Line display.
5. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude .
6. Click One Side > Done .

Sketched Features P a g e 5- 1 1
NOTES
Select the top

planar surface
Sketching
plane
Figure 12: Selecting Sketching Plane
Task 2. Define the front surface as the sketching plane.
1. Leave defaults and Query Sel to select the planar front surface of
the block as the plane to sketch the shape of the cut.
2. The feature should extrude into the part. Click O k a y from the
DIRECTION menu.
Task 3. Orient the model by selecting the orientation references.
1. Click Top from the SKET VIEW menu.
2. Select the top planar surface to begin the SKETCHER.
Note
Instead of manually orienting the model, you can usually click
Default in the SKET VIEW menu to enter the default
sketcher mode.
Task 4. Define the references. The design intent of the cut is to be at a

specified distance from the right side and the bottom of the model.
1. Note that Pro/ENGINEER automatically assumes two references.

To delete these two references from the REFERENCES dialog box,
highlight and click Delete .

NOTES
2. Select the bottom surface and the right side surface as references.
Note that the REFERENCE dialog box entries are both
SURF:F4 (Protrusion). Click Close .
Select this
bottom Select this side
surface as the surface as the
first reference second reference
(selecting it
on edge)
Figure 13: Specifying References
Task 5. Define the section for the cut.
1. Click . Select in the Sketcher to start the line and drag it from
left to right. Left-click [ ] to end the line. Right-click [ ] to

finish the line.
2. Click . Click the right end point of the line as the start point for
the arc and drag a 180-degree arc. Click to end the arc creation.
Note:
If you did not sketch what you wanted, you can undo the
operation by selecting Undo.

NOTES
Figure 14: Creating a 3 Point/ Tangent End Arc
3. From the endpoint of the arc sketch another horizontal line

segment.
4. Finally complete the section by sketching another tangent end arc

that connects the open end of the second line to open end of the
first line.

NOTES
Figure 15: Completing Section Sketch
Task 6. Make the two horizontal lines equal in length.
1. Impose the Equal Length Sketcher constraint. Click and .
2. Select the two horizontal lines you want to make equal.
3. If the sketch is over-constrained, the RESOLVE SKETCH dialog

box appears.
Figure 16 Resolve Sketch Dialog Box

NOTES
4. Retain the Equal Lengths constraint and delete any other

constraint.
Task 7. Override existing weak dimensions and constraints with your

own strong dimensions and constraints.
1. Click . Select a point approximately half way between the two

arc centers. When the centerline snaps to vertical, click again.
2. Check for the symmetric constraint symbols—two arrows

indicating a symmetric constraint located about the centerline. If
INTENT MANAGER added a dimension, click Undo and re-create
the centerline. Or, force it using the CONSTRAINT menu.
3. Click . Create the dimensions of the cut section.
4. To create the radius dimension, select the perimeter of the left arc
and to place the dimension.
5. To create the arc center-to-center dimension, select the each of the
arc centers and to place the dimension.
6. To create the location dimension from the right surface to the

centerline, select the centerline and then select the right surface
and to place the dimension.
7. To create the location dimension from the bottom surface to the

left arc center, select the arc center and the bottom surface and
to place the dimension.

NOTES
Figure 17: Specifying Constraints and Dimensions.
8. Complete dimensioning the size and location of the cut section.
Task 8. Modify the dimensions of the cut.
1. Change the dimension values. Click . Select a dimension.

NOTES
Figure 18: MODIFY DIMENSION Dialog Box
2. Type in the correct number and press <ENTER>.
3. Repeat the above step to modify all the other dimensions of the
cut.
Figure 19: Modified Dimensions

NOTES
Task 9. Finish defining the cut.
1. Click .
2. Click O k a y to accept the arrow pointing towards the inside of the

section to define the direction of the cut.
3. To define the depth, click Thru All > Done .
4. Click OK .
Note:
Note that the system placed a circle with an X in the center of
the part to indicate the direction of feature creation. It
represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the screen in the
direction that is into the screen (away from you). A circle with
a dot in the center represents a 2-D arrow perpendicular to the
screen in the direction that is out of the screen (toward you).
5. View your new cut feature in different views.
Figure 20: Finished Cut

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Protrusion

Task 1. Create a cylindrical protrusion on the right side of the model.
TOP orientation
reference
Sketching
plane
Create this
protrusion
Figure 21: The Completed Protrusion
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
2. Click One Side > Done from the ATTRIBUTES menu.
3. Select the right side of the block as the sketching plane.
4. The arrow points outward from the block. Click O k a y from the
DIRECTION menu.
5. Click Top and select surface shown in the preceding figure.
Task 2. Specify two references for Sketcher in the DEFAULT view.
1. Click View > Default Orientation .
2. Click [Toggle grid on/off], so that you can clearly see the
block.
3. Delete the two references in the REFERENCE dialog box.

NOTES
4. Select the top surface of the model as reference. and select

Query Select from the pop-up menu to select the back hidden
surface.
5. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
Select this top

surface as a
reference
Select the
back surface
as a reference
Figure 22: Selecting Section References
6. Click View > Sketch Orientation .
Task 3. Define the section for the protrusion.
1. Click .
2. Select in the Sketcher to begin a sketch of a small circle.
3. Select again to finish the circle.
Task 4. Strengthen dimensions.
1. Click
2. Select the circle twice and to place the dimension.

NOTES
3. Select the center of the circle and the left reference surface. to
place the dimension.
4. Place the dimension between the center of the circle and the left
reference surface.
Task 5. Change the dimension values to reflect the design
1. Click and select each of the three dimensions consecutively

while holding <SHIFT>.
2. Click Edit > Modify . The MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box

appears.
3. Change dimension values for each as shown in the preceding

figure.
4. Click to close the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box.

NOTES
5. Click in the INTENT MANAGER to complete the section.
Task 6. Define a blind depth value for the protrusion.
1. Click Blind > Done from the SPEC TO menu.
2. Type [3] in the ENTER DEPTH window and press <ENTER>.
3. Click OK .
4. View your model in different displays.
5. Click File > Save and press <ENTER>.
6. Click File > Erase > Current ; then click Yes from the dialog box.
Figure 24: The Completed Model

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Cut and Protrusion are two important features that can be sketched
using the Sketcher Mode
• Both of these sketched features can be created in extruded and
revolved forms
• When sketching a new feature, you can always sketch it as convenient
and later alter the dimensions
• In a new sketch, lines, arcs, and circles can be constrained to different
properties such as equal lengths, concentricity, perpendicularity,
parallelism and symmetry.
• For a sketched feature, you not only have to dimension it properly but
also have to orient it in relation to reference planes (usually the side
surfaces of the base feature).

6
Default Datum Templates
In this module you learn how to use datum planes to create parts.
Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of using datum planes as base features.

• Describe the difference between internal and external datum
planes.
• Start new designs with default or offset datum planes as base
features.
• Align sketched sections to parts.
• Orient additional datum planes within your model.
Page 6-1
NOTES
USING DATUM PLANES AS BASE FEATURES

Base Features
A base feature is the first feature that you create when starting a new part.
It is the foundation for the rest of the model. Features that are added to the
model later depend on the base feature for many or all of their references.
The following figure shows an example where a cylinder is used as the
base feature for a part.
Figure 1: Base Feature
Defining aDatum Plane

A datum plane is an imaginary plane on which you use as a reference for
orienting your parts and assemblies. Datum planes are infinite, two-
dimensional, and perfectly flat. They have no mass or volume. By default,
datum planes have two sides: yellow (the active side) and red (the passive
side). In the default mode, the system displays datum planes with a yellow
side and a text name such as FRONT, TOP , and RIGHT.

NOTES
Using a Default Datum as the Base Feature

When creating new models, Pro/ENGINEER automatically provides a
default datum plane as the first feature. This is done because datum planes
enable you to:
• Develop parent/child relationships between different features.

• Use planar (flat) surfaces as references, especially useful when
designing models that do not have any flat surfaces.
Creating Datum Planes

You can create a datum at any time. You can create additional datum
planes as reference features for a model where references do not already
exist.
When creating a datum, you can define it using several different methods.
Though methods of creation differ, the Datum Plane constraints are the
same:
• Parallel • Angle
• Through • Normal
• Offset • Blend Section
• Tangent
Creating Internal Datum Planes

If you do not want datum planes to be a feature of your model, you can
create an internal datum, on the fly, when specifying sketching or
reference planes. Sometimes, it is beneficial to construct internal datums
because the system builds their dimensions into your sketched feature,
while displaying the datums only temporarily.
Consider the following rules for datum planes created on-the-fly:
• Datum planes created during feature creation are internal to and belong
to that feature.
• Datum planes on-the fly become invisible after you create the feature.
Any associated dimensions positioning the datum plane are included
with those of the feature. This gives you more choices for varying
dimensions when you create a feature pattern.

Default Datum Templates P a g e 6- 3
NOTES
• When you use Copy/Mirror to copy features and use datum planes on-
the-fly as the mirror plane, this datum plane stays visible because it
can be referenced by more than one feature.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create new part models in Pro/ENGINEER using
the default templates.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create an extruded and a revolved feature using the
default datum planes built into the default template.
In Exercise 2, you create a datum plane during the creation of a solid

feature to establish good parent-child relationship.
Tools
Table 1: Interface Icons
Icons Description
Saved views
Draw circle
Done section
Zoom in
Modify dimension
Create dimension

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a New Part

Task 1. Create a new part model using the default template.
1. Click File > New . Name the part. Type [MOTOR_SHAFT]. Accept
the Use default template option and click OK .
2. A default coordinate system and three orthogonal default datum

planes, FRONT, RIGHT and TOP, appear with their yellow sides
facing you.
3. Click [Saved views]. Notice the list of pre-defined saved views

that have been created by using the default template.
4. From the MENU MANAGER click Setup > Units > millimeter
Newton Second (mmNs) > Set. Click O K from the WARNING
dialog box, then click Close .
5. Click Done to exit from the SETUP menu.
Figure 1: Default Datum Planes and Coordinate System

NOTES
Task 2. Use the default datums as your sketching reference for the first
feature.
1. Select the datum tag FRONT to make it the sketching plane.
3. Notice that the system automatically selected the reference plane

and placed you in the Sketcher mode. If you want to change the
attributes of the protrusion you can always use the Redefine
option.
4. Notice that the INTENT MANAGER places references (RIGHT and

TOP) for the intended protrusion automatically. Click Close .
5. Click [Draw circle]. Select the intersection of the default

datum planes. Drag the diameter out of a circle and place it. The
INTENT MANAGER adds a weak diameter dimension. Middle-
click to complete the circle creation.
Figure 2: Sketched Circle at Center of Datums

NOTES
Task 3. Modify the diameter dimension and regenerate the section to

see the change.
1. Change the diameter. Double-click the diameter dimension. Type

[14.5].
2. Press <ENTER>.
3. Click . Notice that the system automatically assigns a depth

and completes the protrusion.
4. Change the view to the default view. Click and Default.
Task 4. Modify the depth to 240mm.
1. Click > Dynamic Modify after selecting the protrusion id in

the model tree. Notice that you can use the yellow icon in the
middle of the protrusion to dynamically modify the depth by
dragging.
2. From the PART menu, click Modify > Value and select on the
protrusion that you just created. Select the depth value and type
[240]. Click Regenerate from the PART menu.
Task 5. Add a revolved cut feature to the protrusion you created. As

section references, use the default datums.
1. Click Insert > Cut > Revolve .
3. Query Sel the RIGHT datum plane as the sketching plane. Click
OKAY to confirm the direction of creation.
4. Select LEFT from the SKET VIEW menu and Query Sel the
FRONT datum plane as the reference plane.
5. Now the RIGHT datum plane is the sketching surface.

NOTES
Task 6. In a revolved section you need to use a centerline in the sketch

to define an axis of revolution. Create a centerline and proceed to define
the section.
1. Click [Zoom in] and on the left end of the shaft.
2. If the REFERENCES dialog box accidentally closes before you

define references. Click Sketch > References to access it
3. Delete the two references that the INTENT MANAGER

automatically provides.
4. Select the TOP datum plane as the first reference. Then select the
silhouette edge of the protrusion and the left end surface of the
protrusion as the second and third references as shown in the
following figure.
Select the silhouette edge

Select the as the second reference.
end surface
as the third
Select the TOP datum

plane as the first
reference.
Figure 3: Selecting References for the Cut
5. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
6. Sketch a centerline that coincides with the TOP datum plane.
7. Sketch three line segments.

NOTES
Figure 4: Sketch for Revolved Cut

(dimensions not shown for clarity)
Task 7. Create the diameter dimension.
1. Click .
2. In order to get the dimension scheme shown, select the horizontal

line you sketched. Select the centerline. Select the horizontal line
again. Middle-click to place the dimension.
Figure 5: Creating the Diameter Dimension

NOTES
3. Modify the dimensions of the section. Click [Modify

dimension] and change the dimensions.
Task 8. Finish defining the revolved cut on the model.
1. Click .
2. If necessary, flip the arrow to remove material from the inside of

the section. Otherwise, click O k a y.
3. Select 360 and click Done in the REVOLVE TO menu.
4. Click OK to finish the feature.
5. Change to the default view. Click View > Default.
6. Save the model.
7. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes.

Default Datum Templates P a g e 6- 1 1
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating an Internal Datum Plane

In this exercise, you add a protrusion to the model by creating an internal
datum plane feature on the fly.
Add this
protrusion.
Figure 7: The Start and Finished Models
Task 1. Add a datum plane to the part to use as the sketching reference
for the cylindrical protrusion you want to create.

intro_proe_320 \ 06_templates_datum_planes.
3. Open the part model INTERNAL_DTM.PRT.
5. Click One Side > Done in the ATTRIBUTES menu.
6. Click Make Datum > Offset in SETUP PLANE menu. Select the
planar front surface of the block as a reference for the new plane.

NOTES
Offset from this

front surface
Figure 8: Creating a Sketching Plane
7. In the OFFSET menu, click Enter Value .
8. Type [1] as the offset value. Click Done .
Task 2. Finish defining the protrusion by using the datum plane as a

sketching plane.
1. Flip the direction of the intended protrusion to point towards the

model. Click O k a y to accept the direction of feature creation.
2. Click Top and select the top planar surface of the block as the
reference plane.
3. Delete the two default references. Make the A_2 axis of the first
cylinder as the first reference. Make the visible vertical surface of
the block from which the cylinder protrudes as the second
reference. Close the REFERENCES dialog box.
4. Click . Sketch a circle on the cylinder with its center coinciding

with the A_2 axis.
5. Modify the dimension of the circle’s diameter to 0.88.
6. Modify the distance from the left vertical surface of the base block
feature to 1.5.

NOTES
7. Click .
8. Click Thru Next > Done in the SPEC TO menu.
9. Complete the feature.
10. Shade and save the model.
Figure 10: Completed Model

NOTES

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Datum planes are infinite, two-dimensional, flat references that have

no mass or volume.
• Datum planes act as the ideal base feature to create new parts and
models.
• Additional datum planes can be created in Pro/ENGINEER while
creating a model.
• There are different kinds of datum planes; such as those that are
created as Through/Plane, Offset/Plane, Offset/Coord Sys, and Blend
Section.
• You can build internal datum planes when you do not want the datums
to be a feature of your model.

7
Parent/Child Relationships
In this module you learn how to work with parent/child relationships
in Pro/ENGINEER. The order that features are created and the
references that they provide creates hierarchical relationships. These
parent/child relationships determine feature interaction. You will
learn how to manage parent/child relationships to achieve the
desired behavior in your models.
Objectives
• Describe parent/child relationships in Pro/ENGINEER.

• Describe sketched feature parent/child relationships.
• Describe Pick-and-Place feature parent/child relationships.
• Change the parents of a feature in a model using the Reroute ,
Redefine and Reorder options to change the original design
intent.
Page 7-1
NOTES
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS IN PRO/ENGINEER

Solid modeling is a cumulative process where the creation of certain
features must, by necessity, precede others. When creating a new feature,
Pro/ENGINEER references it to previously defined features for
information on size, shape, location, and orientation. This forms the basis
for a parent/child relationship. The feature used as the reference becomes
the parent to the new feature, the child.
Parent/child relationships determine how features react when other

features in the model change.
Pick-and-Place Feature Parent/Child Relationships

Pick-and-Place features also have parent references because they use
existing geometry for location and orientation. Any selection of a surface
or edge for this purpose generates a parent/child relationship.
The system supplies different options to select a reference, resulting in

different parents for the feature.
• Tangent Chain – specifies a reference only to the selected edge, but

developing the feature along all edges that are tangent to the selected
one.
• One by One – specifies a reference for each selected edge.
• Surf Chain – specifies a reference to the surface that is selected and a
single edge. It also can create references to selected edges if the option
From-To is used.
Sketched Feature Parent/Child Relationships

When sketching a feature, the sketching plane and the reference plane
become parents of the new feature. If the sketching plane moves, the
feature moves along with it. Similarly, if the reference plane that
determines orientation changes, the orientation of the feature changes as
well.

P a g e 7- 2 Introduction to ProENGINEER
NOTES
Figure 1: Example of Parent/Child Relationship
Modifying a Feature’s Parents

You can alter the parents of a feature by rerouting or redefining it.
Rerouting Parent Features

With the Reroute option in the FEAT menu, you can change the parents
of a feature including sketching planes, reference planes, and anything
specified as a reference in Sketcher.
When rerouting a feature, Pro/ENGINEER highlights its external

references one at a time and identifies each reference in the message area.
You have two choices. You can click Alternate and select a new
reference, or click Same Ref and retain the current reference.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER considers references that you use for
alignment to be dimensioning references.

Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Bracket with Datums
Redefining Features
The Redefine option in the FEAT menu also changes the parents of a
feature. When you select a feature to redefine, the same feature dialog box
appears that is visible during initial feature creation.
Figure 3: Feature Dialog Box

NOTES
Working with Sketched Features

When sketching a section, you can change the sketch plane or the sketch
itself. The features that you created after sketching a section temporarily
disappear.
When you select the Section element for a sketched feature, the menu
displays the following options:
Sketch Plane – Prompts you to specify a sketching plane and reference.

You can select and redefine all of the elements listed in the dialog box.
Therefore, in addition to being able to change the parents of a feature, you
can also change other elements such as direction and material-side-plane
before entering Sketcher mode. For each, you can select an alternate
reference or retain the same reference.
Sketch – Allows you to use Sketcher mode to change sketched entities,

add/remove constraints, and create and delete dimensions. The system
warns you if you try to delete an entity that is referenced by another
feature.
Resolving Regeneration Problems

Pro/ENGINEER bases the definition of a feature on the parent feature. If
parent features are missing, the system automatically brings you into the
RESOLVE environment.
Note
To remove a feature from the regeneration process, you must
also decide what to do with the child features, if they exist.
Regenerating Parent/Child Features

When regenerating a model, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates features one at a
time, following the order in which they appear in the MODEL TREE. As
you create new features, it adds them to the bottom of the list in the
MODEL TREE.

NOTES
Using the Feature Reorder and Insert Modes

The R e o r d e r or Insert Mode options in the FEAT menu modify the order
of the features. Or you can simply drag and drop the features in the model
tree to reorder their positions.
Note
You must regenerate a parent feature before you regenerate its
children. Therefore, you cannot reorder a parent to be after its
children; nor can you reorder a child to be before its parents.
Using the Insert Mode option, you can create one or more features at a
selected position in the regeneration process. You can insert features at
any point, except before the first feature or after the last feature. After you
click Activate , you select the feature after which to insert features.
The system suppresses any features after it in the regeneration process. If

you click Cancel to stop inserting features, you must then specify if you
want to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated
insert mode. If you resume them, the system places them after the inserted
features.

NOTES
Rectangular base
added
Base caps
hole
Cylindrical protrusion Rectangular Base Added Finished model

with hole added
Figure 4: Reordering the Hole
Insert mode activated Protrusion added

before hole
Figure 5: Inserting the Protrusion

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to alter the existing parent/child
relationships in a model and create new parent/child relationships to
capture the changed design intent.
Method
In Exercise 1, you move the cylindrical protrusion on the base protrusion
and place it on the cut feature by using the Reroute feature. This involves
creating new parent/child relationships for the cylindrical protrusion.
In Exercise 2, you delete the second protrusion and modify the shape of
the slot feature by using the Redefine feature.
Tools
Table 1: Interface and Sketcher Icons
Icons Description
No Hidden
Create constraint
Create dimension
Shading

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using Feature Reroute
Second Cylindrical
protrusion protrusion
Cut
Base
protrusion
Slot feature
Figure 6: Original Model
Figure 7: Finished Models after Exercises 1 and 2
Task 1. Reroute the half cylinder protrusion to the surface of the cut
feature.
1. Click File > Set Working Directory.

intro_proe_320 \ 07_pc_relationships .
3. Retrieve the P_C_EXERCISE.PRT.
4. Click [No hidden].

NOTES
5. Click Feature > Reroute in the menu manager and leave the
default selections.
6. Do not roll back the part model. Click No from the message area.
7. Select the half-cylindrical protrusion.
8. Specify a new reference for the sketching plane. Leave the default
Alternate .
9. Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the cut.
Select this
surface as the
sketching plane
Select this
surface as the
second
dimension
Figure 8: Rerouting References for the Protrusion
10. Leave DTM3 as the horizontal reference. Click Same R e f.
11. Leave the back surface as the dimensional reference. Click S a m e

R e f.
12. Change the second dimensional reference. Leave the default

Alternate.
13. Click Query Sel to select the side of the model, as shown in the
preceding figure.
Task 2. The model enters the Resolve environment because the changes
that you have made created a problem. Investigate the problem and resolve
it.
1. Read the INFORMATION window that appears. It indicates that a

slot feature needed to regenerate the model is missing references.

P a g e 7- 1 0 Introduction to ProENGINEER
NOTES
2. Click Undo Changes > Confirm .
Task 3. Investigate the parent/child relationships of the slot feature.
1. Click Info > Parent/Child. Select the slot on the front side of the
block.
2. In the REFERENCE INFORMATION WINDOW dialog box, select

the Parent’s List to highlight it.
3. Click Tree > Expand > All .
Figure 9 References Information Window
4. Select SURFACE ID 16. The front surface of the block highlights

as the sketching plane.
5. Select SURFACE ID 64. The top of the cylinder highlights as the

horizontal reference plane. This is an unwanted relationship.
6. Select EDGE ID 73. The bottom edge of the cylinder highlights as

a dimensional reference. This reference caused the reroute to fail.
7. Select EDGE ID 47. The right edge of the second protrusion

highlights as a dimensional reference. This edge was used as an
alignment reference.

Parent/Child Relationships P a g e 7- 1 1
NOTES
8. Click Close .
Task 4. Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the
cylindrical protrusion.
1. Click Edit > References.
2. Do not roll back the part model. Click No .
3. Click Same Ref. Read the message window.
4. Leave the default Alternate .
5. Click Query Sel to select the top surface of the large protrusion as
the new horizontal reference plane.
Second New horizontal reference
protrusion
New dimensional reference
Figure 10: Rerouting the Slot
6. Leave the dimensional reference to the second protrusion. Click

Same R e f.
7. Change the edge of the cylinder's dimensional reference. Leave the

default Alternate .
8. Click Query Sel and select the top surface of the large protrusion
as shown in the preceding figure.
9. The message area displays the message: “Feature rerouted

successfully.”

NOTES
Task 5. Reroute the cylindrical protrusion as planned.
1. Select PROTRUSION ID 58 in the MODEL TREE and click Edit >

Preferences.
2. Do not roll back the model.
3. Query Sel and select the top surface of the cut as the new
sketching plane.
4. Do not change the horizontal reference. Click Same R e f.
5. Do not change the dimensional reference. Click S a m e Ref.
6. Query Sel and select the side of the model as the second
dimensional reference.
7. The successfully rerouted cylindrical feature appears as shown in

the following figure.
Figure 11: The Re-routed Cylindrical Feature

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Feature Redefine

Task 1. The new design intent of this model dictates you should remove
the second protrusion from the model by deleting it.
1. Right-click PROTRUSION ID 29 in the MODEL TREE, then select

Delete .
Figure 12: Warning Dialog Box
2. Click Cancel in the WARNING window.
3. The slot highlights because it is a child of the second protrusion.
Task 2. Break the parent/child relationship between the slot and the
protrusion. In addition, change the section of the slot.
1. the slot feature in the MODEL TREE and select Redefine .
2. Click Section > Define > Sketch from the FEATURE dialog box.
Tips & Techniques:

You can also double-click on an element to change its
definition, instead of highlighting and clicking Define .

NOTES
3. To change the section, select the left vertical sketched line, as

shown in the following figure. Click Edit > Delete .
4. Create a tangent end arc.
Delete this
line segment.
Sketch this arc.
Figure 13: New Section for Slot
Task 3. Change the dimensioning scheme of the slot.
1. Click > Explain .
2. Read the message area.
3. Select the vertical bar constraint, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
select this edge
select this
vertical bar
constraint
symbol
Figure 14: Interrogating a Constraint
5. Click Sketch > References in the MAIN MENU.
6. Select EDGE: F6. Click Delete > Close > Yes.
Tips & Techniques:

You can easily determine external references to edges and
surfaces by looking for the brown dashed line.
7. Click View > Default.
8. Click . Add a dimension from the left side of the base

protrusion to the center of the left arc, as shown in the following
figure.

NOTES
Figure 15: Dimensioning the Slot
Tips & Techniques:

It is always good practice to dimension in the default view to
avoid unwanted parent/child relationships.
9. Click > OK .
Task 4. Remove the second protrusion from the design.
1. Highlight Protrusion id 29 in the MODEL TREE. Right-click and

select Delete .
2. Click OK to confirm the deletion of the second protrusion.

NOTES
Figure 16: Second Protrusion Deleted
Task 5. Change the design so that the slot passes completely through the
model.
1. Click Feature > Redefine in the menu manager.
2. Select the slot.
3. Click Depth > Define > Thru All > Done > OK.
Task 6. Analyze the model using shading.
1. Click [Shading]. Spin the model.
2. Click View > Saved Views >BACK > Set > Close .
Tips & Techniques:
You can also select named views directly by clicking

[Saved view list].

NOTES
Figure 17: Slot Redefined Using the Thru All Option
Task 7. Change the holes to have a collar.
1. Look in the MODEL TREE and confirm that the hole pattern (listed
as PATTERN ) is the last feature in the model.
2. Select SHELL from the MODEL TREE and drag it below

PATTERN.
3. Note that the holes now all have a collar.
Figure 18: Reordered Shell Feature
4. Close the model without saving the changes.
5. Click File > Erase > Current > Yes.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Parent/child relationships are hierarchical relationships within a model

whose features are cumulatively built beginning with a base feature.
• During regeneration of a model, Pro/ENGINEER strictly follows the
order in which the features were built while accounting for
parent/child relationships among them. A child feature can never be
regenerated before its parent feature.
• To capture changing design intent, parent-child relationships between
various features of a model have to be re-negotiated. For this,
Reroute , Redefine , and Reorder are used as needed.
• By using the Insert Mode option, new features can be inserted in

between features of an existing model.

8
Sweeps and Blends
In this module, you learn how to add and remove material using
sweeps and parallel blends.
Objectives
• Create swept features.

• Create parallel blend features.
Page 8-1
NOTES
SWEEP AND TRAJECTORIES

Creating Sweeps and Trajectories
Sweeps consist of two features—the trajectory and the cross-section. The
trajectory is the path along which you sweep the cross-section. The first
step in defining a sweep is to creating a trajectory. The second step is to
create the cross-section. You must locate the cross-section with respect to
the trajectory.
A sweep can add material when defined as a protrusion, or remove

material when defined as a cut.
A sweep trajectory can be sketched as either open or closed; that is the

section does not have to end at the point of origin. To illustrate this point,
the following figure provides three different combinations of trajectories
and sections.

NOTES
Open trajectory, closed section
Closed trajectory, closed section (No Inn Fcs)
Closed Trajectory, Open Section (Add Inn Fcs)
Figure 1: Sweep Trajectories and Section
Creating Parallel Blends

A Blend feature combines at least two planar sections joined together at
their edges with transitional surfaces to form a continuous feature. You
can use blends as forms for either protrusions or cuts.
You create a parallel blend from a single section that contains multiple
contours, called subsections. In the following figure, each segment is
matched to the subsequent segment, creating the blended surfaces between
the corresponding segments. Therefore, each section or subsection must
always have the same number of segments/vertices.

Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8- 3
NOTES
Straight transition Smooth transition
Figure 2: Parallel Blends
When blending the sections together, Pro/ENGINEER connects the start

point of each section and continues to connect the vertices of the sections
in a clockwise manner.
The Feature Tools option in the SKETCH pull down menu changes the
start point for any section to control the blend or twist of the blended
surfaces. Or you can use the pop-up menu to select a different start point.
Figure 3: Start Points and Twisted Blend

NOTES
Figure 4: Start Points and Blend Shape
When creating a parallel blend, you create all of the sections for the blend
in the same sketch. You toggle between sections to distinguish between
each sections. The feature attribute for parallel blends is smooth or
straight.
• The straight attribute blends the transitional surfaces from one section
straight to the next.
• The smooth attribute connects the section with spline surfaces.
Subsections can be located with respect to the other subsections via
dimensions or constraints. If you begin your part with three default datum
planes, all subsections can be dimensioned to them. As with any feature,
the dimensioning scheme is important, since it captures the design intent
of the model.

NOTES
Figure 5: Dimensioning Parallel Blend Sections

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you will create parallel blends and simple sweeps.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a parallel blend by first retrieving a section to be
used for subsections. This is an effective technique to use for common
sections, especially if they are complex.
In Exercise 2, you create a swept protrusion.
Tools
Icons Description
Toggle grid
Refit
Toggle datum planes

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Parallel Blend Features

Task 1. Start a new part without using the default datum template.
1. Create a new part and name it PARALLEL_BLEND.PRT.
2. Uncheck the Use default template option, as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 6: Creating Part without using Default Template
3. Click Empty > OK in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box.
4. Click Insert > Datum > Plane .
Task 2. Create a parallel blended protrusion.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend
2. Accept all the defaults in the BLEND OPTS menu and click Done .
3. Leave the default Straight in the ATTRIBUTES menu and click

Done .
4. Select DTM3 as the sketching reference and click O k a y for

direction.

NOTES
5. Click Top and select DTM2 as the reference plane.
6. Toggle to show the gridlines.
7. Zoom in (about 4 X 4 grid squares) at the intersection of DTM1

and DTM2.
Task 3. Retrieve the first section from disk and place it.
1. DTM1 and DTM2 as section references are placed. Close the

REFERENCES dialog box.
2. Click Sketch > Data from File .
3. Select BLEND.SEC and click O p e n. A small blend section and the

SCALE ROTATE dialog box will appear.
4. For the Scale option, type [3 . 0] and press <ENTER>. For Rotate ,
leave the default [0 . 0] value. Do not close the dialog box.
5. Select the center point of the section; move and place it so that
your vertical and horizontal centerlines snap to DTM1 and DTM2
respectively.
Place center
point of
section at
intersection of
datums
Figure 7: Placing the First Section
6. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
7. Click [Refit].

NOTES
Task 4. Add the second section to the sketch using the same sketch, but
a different scale value.
1. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section . Notice the first
subsection gets deactivated and turns gray.
2. To retrieve the BLEND.SEC section again, click Sketch > Data

from file .
3. For Scale, type [1.0] and press <ENTER>.
4. Leave the default [0.0] as the rotating angle. Do not close the
SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
5. Place the sections so that the centerlines are coincident with the
previous section centerlines.
6. Click in the SCALE ROTATE dialog box.
Task 5. Use the same sketch again for the third section of the blend
assigning it a scale factor of 2.
1. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section . Make sure both
the sections are gray before bringing in the final section.
2. Retrieve the same BLEND.SEC section again and assign a scale

factor of [2.0].
3. The three sections should look as shown in the following figure.
4. Change the view to default.

NOTES
Figure 8: Creating the Third Section
Task 6. Define the feature.
1. Click to get out of the intent manager.
2. Type [30.0] as the depth for the second section and press
<ENTER>.
3. Type [20.0] as the depth for the third section and press <ENTER>.
4. Click OK .
5. The blend should look as shown in the figure below except the
dimensions will not be visible.

Sweeps and Blends P a g e 8- 1 1
NOTES
Figure 9: Completed Blend
Note:
Note that Pro/ENGINEER uses straight lines as transitions to
attach the vertices of the subsections.
Task 7. Change the shape of the transitional surfaces from a straight line
transition to a spline transition by using Redefine .
1. Right-click on the blend protrusion in the model tree and select

Redefine .
2. Click Attribute > Define > Smooth > Done .
3. Finish the definition. Click OK .
4. Save the file and close the window.

NOTES
Figure 10: Straight and Smooth Surfaces

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Create a Simple Sweep Protrusion

Task 1. Create a part, starting with default datum planes. Create the
base feature protrusion as a sweep.
1. Start a new part and name it SWEEP.PRT.
2. Clear the Use the default template option in the NEW dialog box
and check Empty in the NEW FILE OPTIONS dialog box followed
by OK .
3. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create the default datum planes
or click [Insert datum]
4. Toggle to turn on the datum planes.
5. Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep.
Note:
A sweep is a two-part sketch: the trajectory is first and the
cross-section follows.
Task 2. Sketch the trajectory on DTM2 using DTM3 as the bottom

reference.
1. Click Sketch Traj from the SWEEP TRAJ menu.
2. Select DTM2 and click O k a y for the direction.
3. Click Bottom and select DTM3 as the reference.
4. Check to see if DTM3 and DTM1 are the default references and
close the REFERENCES dialog box.
5. Sketch an open trajectory section consisting of a line, a tangent arc;

and then two lines as shown in the following figure. Place the
correct dimensions.

NOTES
Sketched lines
Sketched arc fillet
Figure 11: Showing Sketch and Dimensions
6. When you have completed the trajectory, click from the

INTENT MANAGER.
7. The system has placed you in another Sketcher session.
Task 3. Note that the centerlines provided by the system at the start
point of the trajectory. The system defines the sketching plane as a plane
normal to the trajectory, located at the start point. Sketch the cross-section
of the sweep.
1. Sketch an inverted T cross-section, as shown in the following

figure. You may want to turn the Sketcher grid off.
Trajectory starts
here
Figure 12: Sketching an Inverted “T”

NOTES
The default view appears as follows:
Start point
Trajectory
Cross-section
Figure 13: Default View
2. Click to complete the section.
3. Click OK to complete feature. The sweep is rounded where there

was an arc in the trajectory, and mitered where there was a corner
(nontangent segment) in the trajectory.
4. Save the file and erase it from memory.
Figure 14: The Completed Sweep

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that
• When defining a Swept Feature, you must define its trajectory and its
cross-section.
• Sweeps can either add or remove material depending on whether they
are defined as protrusions or cuts.
• A parallel blend is created from a single section that contains multiple
contours called subsections.
• The parallel blend feature can have either a straight attribute or a
smooth attribute.

9
Relations and Parameters
In this module you learn to drive the design of a model by using
relations. Relations create explicit parent-child relationships.
Objectives
• Describe the purpose of relations.

• Describe the four types of relations pertaining to models.
• Create relations that allow your child features to drive their parent
features.
• Re-order relations.
• Delete and update invalid relations to accommodate changes to the
design intent.
Page 9-1
NOTES
RELATIONS AND PARAMETERS

Parametric Relations
Relations are user-defined equations written between symbolic dimensions
and parameters. They can be used to control the effects of modifications
on models, to define values for dimensions in parts and assemblies, and to
act as constraints for design conditions.
The following figure represents a simple relation between the two

dimensions of a rectangular feature, where d0 is always twice the size of
d1.
Figure 1: Part Relation - Relation: d0 = 2*d1
The four types of model relations are:
• Assembly relations – Relate different component parameters to one

another using a coding symbol to designate different components.
• Part relations – Relate different feature parameters to one another in
a single part.

NOTES
• Feature relations – Relate parameters specific to one feature in the

model.
• Pattern relations – Relate specific pattern parameters within a
pattern.
Feature relations: Cam slot

shape driven by relation
/*hole centered in plate
d5=d2/2
d6=d3/2
Part relations Assembly relations

Hole centered in plate Bracket centered on
plate
Figure 2: Different Relation Types

Relations and Parameters P a g e 9- 3
NOTES
Representing Relations: Types and Symbols

The table below presents the various elements that you can include in
relations.
Table 1: Elements of Relations
Relation Types: Equality: d0=2* Comparison:

Constraint: d1>= 2.67 d1 d12 = 1.5
if (d4>.25) else
endif d12=1
Dimension Symbols d# – Part dimensions
d#:# – Dimensions in Assembly mode
rd# – Reference dimensions
sd# – Sketcher dimensions
Tolerance Symbols tm# – Minus tolerance
tp# – Plus tolerance
tpm# – Plus/minus tolerance
Instance Symbols Integer parameter for instances in each direction of a
pattern: p0, p1, p2, etc.
User Parameters Numeric parameter (i.e., 3.67)
Character string parameter (i.e., 32-A24-67B)
Yes or no parameter
Model note parameter
Incorporating Your Design Intent Using Relations

Relations enable you to capture sophisticated levels of design intent for
your models. They are an integral part of any advanced design of parts and
assemblies.
Relations allow one feature to drive another. You can take advantage of
this unique capability and use child features to drive the parent features. In
a traditional parent/child relationship, it is the parent feature which always
takes precedence (whether in dimensioning or regeneration). Parametric
relations allows you to craft your model in such as way as to reverse the
parent/child hierarchy.
Note:
Do not create relations using reference dimensions.

NOTES
In the following figure, you could write a relation that drives the
placement of the hole so that it is centered top to bottom:
/*center hole top to bottom
d5=d2/2
Figure 3: Plate Showing Parameters
You could then write another relationship to keep the hole centered from
left to right:
/*center hole left to right
d6=d3/2
Once you have added these relations, Pro/ENGINEER automatically

centers the hole in the plate and retains it at the center, even when you
modify the height or width of the plate later on.
Note:
You can change the symbolic name of a dimension by using
Modify > DimCosmetics > Symbol .

NOTES
Figure 4: Relations that Drive Hole Location
Tips & Techniques:

It is good practice to add a relation as soon as you realize that
you need it in your design. Do not wait until the end of the
design process. It is also good practice to comment your
relations using the /* to document the design intent of the
relations.
You should always test your relations to be sure that they

function correctly.
Order of Relations
Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in sequential order. Therefore, the
order that you enter them in is important. During regeneration of the
model, the system evaluates the relations and checks to see if all of them
are still valid. If not, it issues a warning.

NOTES
The following figure illustrates the consequences of entering relations

improperly:
Relations added:
d5=d4
d4=d2/2
After first regeneration
Figure 5: Reordering Relations
The design intent is to center the hole on the plate. The two relations,
d5 = d4 and d4 = d2/2, are added in that order. After the first
regeneration of the model, the relations do not capture the desired intent.
Design intent is captured by reversing the order of relations. Relations can

be deleted or edited using the Edit Rel option. The final regenerated
model is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Model Regenerated with Relations Sorted

NOTES
Design Changes
As a design cycle progresses, the design intent of a model tends to change.
This may invalidate existing relations in the model. Whenever
Pro/ENGINEER encounters invalid relations during regeneration, it
automatically highlights the problem and prompts you to correct it. You
can either delete the relation or update it.
If you have to modify or delete a relation because of a design change or an

error, you can edit the relation in the model using a system text editor. The
editor that your system uses depends on the type of workstation that you
have.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create relations and manipulate their defining
parameters.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create relations to capture the design intent of a part,
test the relations.
In Exercise 2, you create parameters to control features using relations.

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Relations

Task 1. Center the straight hole on top of the rectangular base solid
feature.

intro_proe_320 \ 09_relations .
3. Open RELATIONS.PRT.
4. Change to wireframe display.
Figure 7: Symbolic Dimensions of RELATIONS.PRT
5. Click Relations from the PART menu.
6. Select the hole to display its dimensions.
7. The dimensions appear in their symbolic form (i.e., d5, d6, d7).
8. Select the block to display its symbolic dimensions.
Task 2. Start adding a relation.
1. Click Add from the RELATIONS menu.

NOTES
2. Enter a comment to describe the function of the relation. Type [/*

center hole front to back]. Press <ENTER>.
3. Type [d6 = d4/2], then press<ENTER>.
4. For the second relation, type [/* Center hole left to

right], then press<ENTER>.
5. Type [d5 = d2/2], then press<ENTER>.
6. Press <ENTER> on a blank prompt line to finish adding relations.
Task 3. Toggle between the numeric and symbolic values.
1. Click Switch Dim from the RELATIONS menu.
2. Click Done from the MODEL REL menu.
3. Click Regenerate . The hole should move to the center of the

block.
Note
If your relation contains an error, click Relations > Edit.
Task 4. Test the two relations by modifying the base feature width and
depth.
1. Click Modify from the PART menu.
2. Select the rectangular base.
3. Select the width of the block and change it to [70.0] from 50.
4. Click Modify from the PART menu. Select the depth of the block
and change it to [90.0] from 50.
5. Regenerate the model.
Task 5. Show the dimensions of the hole.
1. Click Modify from the PART menu.
2. Select the straight hole to display its dimensions.

Relations and Parameters P a g e 9- 1 1
NOTES
3. Confirm that the two locating dimensions are 35 and 45.
4. Change the base back to the original dimension values. Select each
dimension, and type [50.0].
Task 6. Add a relation that limits the diameter of the hole to be less than
or equal to 11.25.
2. Select the hole feature. Identify the symbolic name given to the
hole diameter, (d7).
3. Click Add from the RELATIONS menu.
4. Type an appropriate comment.
5. Type [d7 <= 11.25].
6. Press <ENTER> on a blank line.
Task 7. Test the relation by modifying the diameter dimension.
1. Click Modify > Dimension from the PART menu.
2. Click the diameter dimension followed by Done Sel . The

DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box appears.
3. Type [15 ] as the nominal value and then click OK .

NOTES
Figure 8: Dimension Properties Dialog Box
4. Click Regenerate from the PART menu to update the model.
5. Note the warning in the information window; then close it.
6. Continue the regeneration regardless of the warning.
7. Type [Y] to continue the regeneration, and press <ENTER>.
Task 8. Review the relations via the information window.
1. Click Relations > Show Rel .
2. Close the window and click Done .
3. Modify back to a smaller diameter. Click Modify , select the hole

select the diameter dimension, then type [10.0].

NOTES
Task 9. Resume a hole and counterbore that were previously

suppressed.
1. Click Feature > Resume .
2. Retrieve only the last set of features that were suppressed. Click
Last Set > Done from the RESUME menu followed by Done
from the FEAT menu.
Figure 9: The Resumed Hole

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parameters for Feature-

Control
Task 1. Add a parameter to the model then control the counterbore

depth using the parameter.
2. Click Add Param .
3. Define a real number so the depth can vary infinitely. Click R e a l

Number .
4. Type [depth_ratio] in the message area followed by <ENTER>.
5. Type [.10] followed by <ENTER>.
Task 2. Start to add a relation.
1. Click Part Rel from the MODEL REL menu.
2. Select the surface of the counterbore hole.
3. Click Add .
4. Type [/*control the counterbore depth], then press

<ENTER>.
5. Enter a relation to have the conterbore as deep as the hole minus

the thread depth. Type [d23 = depth_ratio*d22], then press
<ENTER>.
6. Press <ENTER> on an empty line.
Task 3. Test your relation .
1. Increase the total depth of the hole. Click Modify and select on the
counterbore hole.
2. Click the depth dimension and type [30].

NOTES
Task 4. Edit the ratio parameter to change the relationship between the
counterbore and hole.
1. Click Set Up from the PART menu, then click Parameters from
the PART SETUP menu.
2. Leave the default part and click Modify from the MODEL PARAM
menu.
3. Select DEPTH_RATIO and type [.5].
4. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu.
5. Click Regenerate .
Task 5. Change the symbolic name of the entire depth of the hole and
the counterbore depth to document the design.
1. Click Modify > Dim Cosmetics.
2. Select the depth dimension and type [entire_depth].
3. Select depth dimension of the counterbore, then type

[cbore_depth].
4. Click Done from the DIM COSMETIC menu, then click Done from
the MODIFY menu.
Task 6. Inspect the parameter in the model using various methods.
1. Click Setup > Parameters > Info from the MODEL PARAMS
menu.
2. Read the INFORMATION window; then click Close .
3. Click Done from the PART SETUP menu.
4. Click Relations > Show Rel .

NOTES
Figure 10: Relation Information Window
5. Notice that the system lists the relations you have defined along
with the parameters. Also notice that the new symbolic names are
now displayed.
6. Click Close > Done .
7. Save the model and click File > Close Window .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you learned that:
• Relations are user-defined mathematical equations composed of

symbolic dimensions and parameters, which capture design
relationships within a part or among the many component parts of an
assembly.
• There are four different kinds of relations: Assembly Relations, Part
Relations, Feature Relations, and Pattern Relations.
• The ordering of relations is crucial in capturing design intent as
Pro/ENGINEER evaluates relations in consecutive order.
• During model regeneration, invalid or conflicting relations are
highlighted by prompts for resolution.
• The user should always plan ahead to make relations an integral part of
the design of parts and assemblies.
• Relations can be intelligently used to make child features drive their
parent features.

10
Behavioral Modeling
CAD technology has matured through four distinct stages: 2-D
drafting, 3-D wireframe modeling, 3-D solid modeling, and 3-D solid
modeling with associative, parametric, and feature-based
characteristics.
The latest state-of-the-art, 5th generation CAD technology is called
Behavioral Modeling. In this module you learn about the behavioral
modeling capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER.
Objectives
• Describe the purpose of Behavioral Modeling.

• Describe various Behavioral Modeling components and their uses.
• Analyze mass properties.
• Create model and relation analysis features.
• Conduct sensitivity, feasibility, and optimization studies.
P age 10-1
NOTES
BEHAVIORAL MODELING
Product requirements are becoming increasingly volatile and products are
being custom-tailored more and more. In such a scenario, the requirements
for a mechanical design automation technology that automates mundane
design tasks so that the designer can concentrate on creative work
becomes apparent. Behavioral Modeling is such a technology.
Figure 1: CAD Evolution
Behavioral Modeling Features

The power of Behavioral Modeling derives from three factors:
1. Smart Models
2. Objective-Driven Design Capabilities
3. Open Extensible Environment

P a g e 1 0- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Figure 2: Cornerstone of Behavioral Modeling
Smart Models
• Smart models are intelligent designs that adapt to their environment.
• They contain all the specifications and process information they need
within them.
• As smart models are “aware” of their contexts and purposes, the
designer can develop innovative, differentiated, and customer-
responsive products.
Figure 3: Smart Model Adapting to Changing Needs

Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0- 3
NOTES
Objective-Driven Design Capability

• The objective-driven design approach automatically optimizes designs
to meet any number of objectives captured in a smart model.
• It can simultaneously resolve conflicting objectives, a task that was
often impossible using traditional approaches.
• In addition to defining a problem with standard types of measurements
such as the center of gravity or an edge length, more complex
requirements can be captured in features such as surface or curve
analysis or complex equations.
For example, perhaps you want to place a hole coincident with the axis of
the center of gravity of a design. Capturing the center of gravity in a
feature and parametrically tying it to the hole will ensure that the features
remain coincident, even as other design changes are made and the center
of gravity moves to reflect these changes.
Open Environment
• Smart models can accommodate features that link to information in
other applications.
• These external features make the design solution infinitely extensible.
• External features reside within smart models and link to other
applications.
USING BEHAVIORAL MODELER

The following are the uses of the Behavioral Modeler:
• Create feature parameters based on measurements and analyses of the

model.

NOTES
No Overall
Height
Dimension
Figure 4: Creating Parameters

• Create datum geometry based on measurements and analyses of the
model.
Figure 5: Creating Datum Features
• Create new types of measurements tailored to your specific needs.
Surface Area normal to

the centerline of the pipe
at any given location. All
geometry needed for the
calculation is part of the
measurement.
Figure 6: Creating New Types of Measurements

NOTES
• Analyze the behavior of measured parameters as dimensions vary.
Y-Axis = volume of tank
X-Axis = width of tank
Figure 7: Analyze Varying Measurements

• Automatically find the dimension values that achieve a desired
behavior of the model.
Center of Gravity
and Axis of Rotation
must line up
vertically.
Size of the crank can

vary to achieve the goal
while also minimizing
the mass.
Figure 8: Finding the Correct Distance and Size
• Allow information to be passed between external programs and

Pro/ENGINEER.

NOTES
• Spreadsheet programs:
Differential equation solvers
Technical computing environments in numeric computation and high-

level programming languages
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
Light or optics analysis
Piping or HVAC analysis.
Solve model configuration that best satisfies multiple goals and

constraints.
Two pipes in heat

exchangers that cannot
intersect; that have a
minimum allowable bend
radius; and whose length
must be minimized.
Figure 9: Solving Complex Problems
• Perform graph matching.
Measured Curve - Graph

of analysis feature of
current model
Ideal Curve - Match

model to this curve
Figure 10: Graph Matching

NOTES
• Perform motion analyses.
Analyze the
angle through the
full motion range
Analyze the distance

between these two
points through the
full range of motion
Figure 11: Analyzing Motion
Defining the Behavioral Modeler Components

• Analysis Features – A datum feature that measures or evaluates
geometry and produces parameters and geometry as result.
Analysis features
Figure 12: Analysis Features Symbols
Note:
Analysis features are evaluated every time the model is
regenerated. The system establishes a parent-child relationship
between the analysis features and their predecessors in the
regeneration cycle.
• Field Points – A datum point that is partially constrained and free to

move within that constraint.

NOTES
Figure 13: Field Points

• User-Defined Analysis (UDA) – An analysis that is customized to
the users need, and is defined by a set of features.
Figure 14: User-Defined Analysis

NOTES
• Sensitivity Analysis – An analysis that plots how a change to

particular parameter affects the results of an analysis. In the following
figure, the X-axis measures the width dimension and the Y-axis
volume dimension.
Figure 15: Sensitivity Plot

P a g e 1 0- 1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
• Feasibility Study – A study that determines if a specified constraint

or goal can be achieved by varying certain model parameters within
specified ranges.
Figure 16: Feasibility Dialog Box

Behavioral Modeling P a g e 1 0- 1 1
NOTES
• Optimization – If there are multiple solutions to a specified set of

constrains or goals, then optimization is used to determine which
solution provides the minimum or maximum value of a specified goal.
You can incorporate optimization into a model as a feature so that
modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically.
Figure 17: Optimization Dialog Box

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory your learn the diverse practical applications of
behavioral modeling functionality.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a datum analysis feature to measure mass
properties by designing a new propeller blade for underwater applications.
In Exercise 2, you create three analysis features. It is shown that the

position of each analysis feature in the MODEL TREE is critical in order to
ensure that the proper parameter is calculated.
In Exercise 3, you create and use Sensitivity, Feasibility and Optimization

Studies.
Tools
Table 1: Behavioral Modeling Icons
Icons Description
Build feature
Build feature and repeat the same feature type creation
Go to next page
Preview feature geometry
Create an analysis feature

NOTES
EXERCISE 1:Creating a Datum Analysis Feature to

Measure Mass Properties
Task 1. Change the working directory and open the blade part.

intro_proe_320 \ 10_behavioral_modeling.
3. Click > BLADE.PRT.
4. Clear the display of datum planes.
5. Click Utilities > Environment to remove the spin center from the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box. The model appears as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 18: The Blade Part
Note:
The model’s design cycle is partially completed. The model’s
state shown on the screen represents the model with the
preliminary machining step. Not only do you want to find the
mass of the model, but also you want a datum coordinate
system that represents the center of gravity to be created at the
current location in the regeneration cycle.

NOTES
Task 2. Create a datum analysis feature that measures mass.
1. Click Insert > Datum > Analysis.
2. Type [MASS_PROPS] in the NAME box and press <ENTER>.
3. Select MODEL ANALYSIS as the type of analysis, and click

[Next Page].
4. Leave the default Model Mass Properties as the TYPE.
5. Click Compute.
6. If prompted for density in the message window, type [.75].

(The current model units are lbs/in3 )
7. Close the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box.
Task 3. Create the VOLUME and MASS parameters.
1. In the RESULT PARAMS section of the ANALYSIS dialog box,

check that VOLUME is set to YES. Scroll down and set the Mass
parameter name to Yes. Click CREATE section.
2. Click [Next Page].
Task 4. Create a COORDINATE SYSTEM at the center of gravity.
1. With CSYS_COG_95 highlighted, click Yes.
2. Click [Preview]. The following figure displays the

created coordinate system.

NOTES
Figure 19: Created Coordinate Analysis Feature
3. Click [Build Feature].
Task 5. View the values of the newly created parameters as columns in

the MODEL TREE.
1. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.
2. Select Feat Params as the TYPE.
3. Type [MASS] in the NAME box, then press <ENTER>.
4. Type [VOLUME] in the NAME box, then press <ENTER> and click
OK.
5. Notice the parameter values in the MODEL TREE.

(If necessary, widen the model tree or change the width of the
columns.)

NOTES
Figure 20: Parameter Values Reflected in Model Tree
6. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Item Display > Suppressed
Objects > OK .
7. Select the cut in the MODEL TREE and click > Resume .
Notice the MASS and VOLUME parameters have updated.
Figure 21: Updated Parameter Values in Model Tree
Task 6. Create a copy of the analysis feature and reorder it to confirm

that the measurement regenerates in the order of creation.
1. Click Feature > Copy > , select the MASS PROPS feature, and
click > .
2. Expand the group in the MODEL TREE to view the new analysis
feature. Then select the group and click > Ungroup . Notice
that both are indicating the same MASS and VOLUME parameters.
NOTES
3. Select the new analysis feature, then click > Redefine . Modify
the name to MASS_PROPS_2, press <ENTER> and click .
Figure 22: Creating a New Analysis Feature
4. Drag the first MASS_PROPS analysis feature above the cut. Notice
the changing values and COG coordinate system location.
Figure 23: Dynamic Value Changes in Mass Property Calculations
Note:
An Analysis feature’s results are governed by its position in
the model tree. If you were to continue with this model,
additional features could be created that are based on the
results of these analysis features.

NOTES

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Analyze Fluid Volume in a Cup

Task 1. Measure the volume before the shell feature up to a ‘fluid-level’
plane.
1. Open STYROFOAM.PRT.
Figure 24: Start Model
2. In MODEL TREE, click and drag the red insert marker above the
shell feature.
3. Click > Offset and select DTM2. Click Enter Value ,
type [4.0] and click .
4. Click Setup > Name , select the newly created plane from the
MODEL TREE and enter [FLUID_LEVEL]. Click Done from the
PART SETUP menu to return to the highest level.
5. Click [Analysis Feature] > Model Analysis.
6. Type [VOL_SOLID] for the name and press <ENTER>.

NOTES
8. Select One-Sided Volume from the TYPE drop-down menu in the

MEASURE dialog box.
9. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane from the model tree.
10. Click Flip (so that the arrow faces downward) and O K A Y.
11. Notice the calculated volume in the Results section, and click
Close .
12. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes, edit the name to
[VOL], and press <ENTER>.
14. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.
15. Select Feat Params as the Type .
16. Type [Vol] in the name box, then press <ENTER> and click OK.
Figure 25: Model Tree with Volume Parameter
Task 2. Measure the one-sided volume after the shell feature.
1. Click and drag the Insert marker below the shell feature.
3. Type [VOL_SHELL] for the name and press <ENTER>.

NOTES
5. For the TYPE, select One-Sided Volume .
6. Select the FLUID_LEVEL datum plane.
7. Click Flip (so that the arrow faces downward) and OK. Notice the
calculated volume in the RESULTS section, and click Close.
8. Ensure that the volume parameter is set to Yes, edit the name to
[VOL], and press <ENTER>.
Task 3. Create relation type analysis feature. This relation will

calculate the difference between the previous one-sided volumes.
1. Click [Analysis Feature] > Relation from the type button.
2. Type [VOL_FLUID] for the name and press <ENTER>.
4. When the text editor appears, type the relation on one line as
[vol=vol:fid_vol_solid - vol:fid_vol_shell]
5. Click [Build Feature], and observe the volume

calculations as shown below.
Figure 26: Volume Calculations of Styrofoam Cup

NOTES
Task 4. Investigate the fluid volume when the model is modified.
1. Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [5.0] and

Regenerate .
2. Toggle the model tree display off and on to refresh its display. The
volume values should update as shown below.
Figure 27: Updated Volume Values
3. Modify the height of the Fluid_Level plane to [2.50], Regenerate,

and refresh the Model tree.
4. Select the first protrusion from the model tree, and click >
Modify.
5. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure,

Regenerate , and refresh the Model tree.
Figure 28: Modified Styrofoam Model

NOTES
6. The new fluid volume with the modified dimensions is 43.15in3

and is shown in the model tree.
Task 5. Use behavior modeling capabilities to solve for a fluid volume

of an even 50.0
1. Click Add > Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization in the main

menu.
2. Refer to the following figure and set Study Type to Feasibility .
3. Set the design constraint to solve for a vol_fluid = [50.0] . Click

Add from the design constraints area and select VOL: VOL_FLUID.
4. From the parameter drop-down in the DESIGN CONSTRAINTS

dialog box, click S e t and enter [50] as the value followed by OK .
5. Click Add Dimension and select the dimension corresponding to

the Fluid Plane (2.5 dimension).
6. Click Done Sel and enter [2 . 0] and press <ENTER> for the
minimum value and enter [3 . 0] for the maximum value.
Figure 29: Conducting a Feasibility Study

NOTES
7. Click Options > Preferences followed by Run and edit the

Convergence % to [0.001] as shown in the following figure and
click OK.
Figure 30: Setting Convergence Value
8. Click Compute.
9. After notification of a feasible solution, click Close > Confirm.
10. Refresh the model tree and observe that the vol_fluid is [50.0] with
a fluid level of [2.788].
Figure 31: The “Feasible” Solution
11. Click > File > Close Window .

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Crankshaft Optimization

Task 1. Create an analysis feature to measure the mass properties of the
part. Output a MASS parameter and a datum coordinate system at the
center of gravity.
1. Open CRANKSHAFT.PRT.
3. Type [Mass_Props ] for the name, press <ENTER> and click

[Next Page] .
4. If necessary, select Model Mass Properties as the Type, and click

Compute > Close.
5. Toggle the Volume parameter to NO , and the Mass parameter to

YES to create only the Mass parameter.
6. Click [Next Page] .
7. Toggle the Csys creation to YES , edit the name to [COG ], press
<ENTER>, and click .

NOTES
8. Click > Side and note that the current COG is well below the
axis of revolution. Create another analysis feature that measures
the distance between the center of gravity coordinate system and
the crankshaft’s axis of rotation, A_1.
9. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure .
10. Type [ COG_DIST ] for the name, press <ENTER> and click
[Next Page] .
11. Select Distance as the Type, and select A_1 and COG to measure
between them as shown. (The distance should be approximately
0.35)
Figure 33: Distance Measurement
12. Click Close , verify the Distance parameter is set to YES , and
click
Task 2. Use a sensitivity study to determine which dimension

modification (height or width) has the most impact on the COG.
1. Set the following config option which will use Excel to create
graphs instead of the Pro/E graph window. Ask your instructor if
you need assistance.

NOTES
Figure 34: Setting Configuration Option
2. Click Analysis > Sensitivity Analysis > Dimension , and select

the main lobe of the crank as shown below. Note that dimensions
d28 and d27 are the main height and width dimensions. If
necessary, click Info > Switch Dimensions to see dimensions in
their symbolic form.
Figure 35: Selecting Main Lobe of Crank
3. Select d27 and notice that the system by default has placed Min
and Max values for the Variable range at +/- 10%.
4. Click > DISTANCE:COG_DIST > Ok to set the parameter to

plot.
5. Click Compute . After a few moments, the following graph should

appear:

NOTES
Figure 36: Sensitivity Plot
Note:
This is an Excel spreadsheet running inside of Pro/E. on

the graph will allow you to Open, Edit, or Delete the graph.
6. Record the difference between the high and low values on the
vertical graph scale. (0.404 - 0.304 = 0.1) Therefore, changing
this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0.1].
7. Select the graph and > Delete . Then click Dimension , select
d28 , and click Compute .
Figure 37: Modified Sensitivity Plot

NOTES
8. Again, record the difference between the high and low values on
the vertical graph scale. (0.529 - 0.229 = 0.3) Therefore, changing
this dimension by +/-10% would move the COG by [0.3].
9. In conclusion, the Sensitivity Study has determined that the height

dimension (d28) has more of an impact on the COG than the width
dimension (d27).
10. Click Close .
Task 3. Create a FEASIBILITY STUDY to get the center of gravity and

axis of revolution to equal zero. There are certain dimensions that you
already know you can change.
1. Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization > Feasibility .
2. Click Add, select the DISTANCE:COG_DIST parameter, Set the

value to [0 ], and click OK > Cancel.
3. Click Add Dimension , and select dimensions d27, d28, and d31,
then click .
4. Enter the Min and Max values as shown.
Figure 38: Minimum and Maximum Values
5. Click Options > Preferences, check only Graph constraints and

click OK . Click Compute for the results.

NOTES
Figure 39: Optimization Limit Convergence Graph
6. Notice the COG distance quickly dropped from 3.5 to a value very
close to zero with only two iterations.
7. Compare the before and after dimension values as shown below.

Note that the radius value hardly changed, and therefore could be
removed from future studies.
Figure 40: Comparing Dimension Values
8. Click > Side and notice that if these new values were kept, the
COG Csys would coincide with the rotation axis. Conclusion:
balancing this model is feasible.
9. Undo the changes and close the dialog box for now. Click Undo,
then Close from the OPTIMIZATION/FEASIBILITY dialog box.

NOTES
Task 4. Create a third analysis feature so that the material between the
main shaft and the balancing body stays above a certain value.
1. Click [Analysis Feature] > Measure .
2. Type [MATL_DIST ] for the name, press <ENTER> and click

[Next Page] .
3. Select Distance as the Type, and select the two edges shown.
Figure 41: Selecting Edges
4. Click Close , verify the Distance parameter is set to YES , and

click .
Task 5. Redo the Feasibility study to see if a feasible solution can be

found when this new distance parameter is added as another design
constraint.
1. Click Analysis > Feasibility/Optimization . Notice that the

previous values are maintained.
2. Click Add > DISTANCE:MATL_DIST . Set the parameter value to

be ‘> = ’ a set value of [0.25]. Then click OK > Cancel .
3. Click Options > Preferences, and uncheck any available graph

options.
4. Compute the results. (A feasible solution should be found)

NOTES
TASK 6. For the final criteria, check that the mass of the part is
minimized, as well as all the other constraints by running an
OPTIMIZATION STUDY.
1. Click Optimization from the top of the dialog box.
2. Leave Minimize and Mass:Mass_Props as the goal.
3. Compute the results. Notice the reduction of mass on the graph

and that the dimensions are now varied differently.
Figure 42: Observing Graph and Model

NOTES
Task 7. Next, incorporate the Optimization into the model as a feature

so that modifications to the model will be incorporated automatically.
Modify the model to confirm this.
1. From the Optimization/Feasibility dialog, click File > Make

Feature > . Then click Close and repaint the screen. Notice
the Optimization feature in the model tree.
2. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click
> Suppress > OK .
3. Display suppressed features in the model tree. Click View > Model
Tree Setup > Item Display and select Suppressed Objects.
4. Modify the diameter dimension as shown in the following figure

from [ 1.25 ] to [0.75 ] and Regenerate.
Figure 43: Modifying Diameter Dimension
5. Add the distance parameter column to the model tree and switch to
a side view. Notice that now the COG is slightly below center
(0.077).
Figure 44: Side View of Model

NOTES
6. Select the Optimization feature from the model tree and click
> Resume . Notice the model is now balanced again.
Figure 45: Optimized Model

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• Behavioral Modeling gives you the tools you need to design product
models that are driven by your requirements and specifications.
• In traditional design systems, you need to manually iterate the
geometry of designs. Now with Behavioral Modeling tools, you can
now explore optimal solutions with a complete understanding of the
performance and behavior of your design.
• Analysis features allow you to measure geometric properties of the
model at specific points in the list of features or components of the
model. These measurements produce parameters and logical datums
that you can use to determine geometric properties such as mass,
volume, curvature, the center of gravity, and many others. You can
even create your own parameters as the result of a relation or a user-
defined analysis.
• A Feasibility Study searches for a solution within the range of chosen
dimensions to meet a set of constraints. You specify the constraints by
means of one or more analysis feature parameters.
• An Optimization Study solves a feasibility problem with an additional

condition, a goal. The goal is to minimize or maximize some analysis
feature parameter.

11
Drawings and Drawing Templates
You can use the Drawing mode in Pro/ENGINEER to create
detailed drawings of all Pro/ENGINEER models. You can also
import drawings from other systems into Pro/ENGINEER.
Pro/ENGINEER associates drawings with their parent models. The
model automatically reflects any changes that you make to a
drawing. Conversely, drawings also reflect any changes that you
make to a model in Part, Sheetmetal, Assembly, or Manufacturing
modes.
Objectives
• Describe the different types of drawing views in Pro/ENGINEER.

• Create a production drawing for an existing part model.
• Explore the associativity that exists between a model and its
drawing.
• Create dependency between certain drawing views.
• Create a simple production drawing that will detail dimensions and
notes.
Page 11-1
NOTES
DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS
Creating a Drawing
After selecting Drawing from the NEW dialog box and assigning it a
name, the NEW DRAWING dialog box will open. This dialog box gives
you multiple options in which you can assign an associated model, select
the sheet size, and specify an orientation:
• With a portrait orientation, the system uses the larger sheet dimension
as the height and the smaller one as the width.
• With a landscape orientation (the default setting), the system uses the
larger sheet dimension as the width and the smaller one as the height.
• With a variable orientation, the system uses values that you specify for
the height and width of the drawing sheet.
You also have the ability to assign a predefined company format. The
format that you select will automatically define the sheet size and
orientation.
Adding Drawing Views

After selecting a format or specifying a sheet size, you can add views to
your drawing using the V i e w s option. The first view must be a general
view. When first placed, it appears in the default view orientation. Using
the ORIENTATION dialog box, you can reorient it during placement.
Note:
You should always use default datums to orient a general
view.
Types of Views
The five primary view types available in the VIEW TYPE menu are:
• Projection – An orthographic projection of an object as seen from the

front, top, right, or left.
• Auxiliary – A view created by projecting 90 degrees to an inclined
surface, datum plane, or along an axis.

NOTES
• General – A view that you orient and is not dependent upon any other
view for its orientation.
• Detailed – A view that you create by taking a portion of an existing
view and scaling it for dimensioning and clarification purposes. The
boundary for the detailed view can be a circle, ellipse (with or without
a horizontal or vertical major axis), or a spline.
• Revolved – A planar area cross-section revolved 90 degrees about the
cutting plane line and offset along its length.
Figure 1: The Five Main Types of Views
Using the View Type Menu

Using other options in the VIEW TYPE menu, you can specify how much
of the model is visible in the view, as shown in the following figure.
• Full View – Shows the entire model.

• Half View – Shows only the portion of the model on one side of a
datum plane.
• Broken View – Removes sections from large objects between two
points and moves the remaining sections close together.
• Partial View – Shows only the portion of the view that is contained
within a boundary.

Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Specifying How Much of the Model to Make Visible
Adding a Cross-section
To determine if a view is a single surface or a cross-section, you use the
VIEW TYPE menu options:
• Section – Displays a cross-section for a particular view.

• No Xsec – Does not display a cross-section.
• Of Surface – Displays only the selected surface of a particular view
orientation.
The following figure illustrates the various types of cross-sectional views
that you can create using the XSEC TYPE menu.

NOTES
Figure 3: Cross-Sectional Views
Manipulating Views
Using the Move View option, you can move general and detailed views
anywhere on the sheet. However, you can move projection, auxiliary, and
revolved views only along their line of projection.
Using the Delete View option, the PARENT views—views used to create
projection views—cannot be deleted. Instead, they have to be erased with
the Erase View option. Restore erased views using Resume View .
Using the Disp Mode option, you display views independently of the
ENVIRONMENT dialog setting such as Wireframe , Hidden line , and No
Hidden. For example, you can show some views with hidden lines and
others with no hidden lines. Any views that you establish with this option
remain at the same setting regardless of any changes that you make to the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box settings.
Using the Scale option, you can place certain views. Those views have
their own scale parameters that you can change using the Modify option.
When you modify them, only those views and their children change; the
change does not affect the other views in the drawing.

NOTES
DEFINING DRAWING TEMPLATES

Drawing templates are provided by the system to automatically generate
drawings of models.
Drawing templates:
• Automatically create views.

• Set desired view display.
• Create snap lines
• Show model dimensions based on the template.
Drawing templates contain three types of information for creating new drawings.
• Basic information – makes up a drawing but is not dependent on the

drawing model. This information is copied from the template into the
new drawing.
• Instructions – used to configure drawing views and the actions that
are performed on that view, also to build a new drawing with a new
drawing object (model).
• Parametric notes – update to new drawing model parameters and
dimension values. The notes are re-parsed or updated when the
template is instantiated.
Use drawing templates to:
• Define the layout of views • Define tables

• Set view display • Create snap lines
• Place notes • Show dimensions
• Place symbols

NOTES
Customizing Drawing Templates

You can also create customized drawing templates for the different types
of drawings that you create. The advantage of this is the template allows
the creation of portions of drawings automatically.
For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast
part. The machined part template can define the views that are typically
placed for a drawing of a machined part. You can:
• Set the view display of each view.

• Place company standard machining notes.
• Automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.
DETAILING THE DRAWING

Detailing is important as a method for communicating design intent to
machinists, mold makers, and other production personnel.
Once the views are created on a drawing, showing the dimensions are
usually just a click of a button. Therefore the redundancy involved in both
the designer and the draftsman duplicating the same dimensions is
eliminated.
In manufacturing, additional dimensions in the drawing will need to be

created to convey additional information.
Once the driving dimensions in the drawing are in place, they are fully
modifiable and changes are immediately reflected in the model. This
associativity allows fast and efficient design development.

NOTES
Creating Feature Dimensions

Feature dimensions are created in the actual part and assembly models. In
the drawing, they only appear in a single view to prevent double
dimensioning.
Feature Dimensions have many options:
• Show All – Shows all dimensions for the model.

• View – Shows all dimensions of a selected view.
• Feature – Shows the dimensions of a selected feature.
• Feature & View – Shows all dimensions of a selected feature in a
selected view.
• Part – Shows the dimensions of a selected part.
• Part & View – Shows the dimensions of a selected part in a selected
view.
Creating Driven Dimensions

Dimensions that you actually create in Drawing mode are known as
Driven dimensions. To create them, click Create from the DETAIL menu
and Dimension from the DETAIL ITEM menu; then select the desired
geometry.
Modifying and Deleting Driven Dimensions

In contrast to feature dimensions, you cannot modify driven dimensions in
a production drawing because their values are based on the part model.
However, you can delete them from a drawing.
Manipulating Dimensions
Once you have displayed dimensions in a drawing, you can use options in
the DETAIL menu to manipulate them in various ways:
• Use Move Text to relocate the dimension text along the dimension or
leader elbow line.
• Use Mod Attach to locate dimensions of rounds and chamfers on
another reference of the same feature.
• Use Switch View to move a dimension to another view.

NOTES
• Use Flip Arrows to flip arrows inside or outside the extension lines.
• Use Clip to clip extension lines to a selected location.
• Use B r e a k to break an extension line.
• Use Align to align dimensions.
Creating Drawing Notes

Use the Note option in the DETAIL ITEM menu to create drawing notes by
either typing them in or pasting from a text file.
The NOTE TYPES menu allows you to specify leaders, text justification,
and text styles.
Parametric Notes
When you include a dimension or parameter in a note, it is referred to as a
Parametric Note.
To change a dimension value in a Parametric Note, choose Modify from

the DRAWING menu and select the value. To specify parameter
information, use the following format:
• Dimensions – &d#, where # is the dimension ID.

• Instance number – &p#, where # is the parameter ID (for example,
&p0).
• User-defined parameters – &xxxxx, where xxxxx is the symbolic
name of the parameter

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create detailed drawings of solid parts and explore
the associativity between drawings and part models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a drawing of a gear part from a default template.
You explore various options available and create additional views.
In Exercise 2, you modify the views in the drawing in different ways and
regenerate it to explore its associativity with the solid gear part.
In Exercise 3, you retrieve the gear part drawing that you started earlier,
manipulate its dimensions and create notes.
Tools
Table 1: Drawing and Interface Icons
Icons Description
Select icon
Wireframe display
Dimension

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing
Fourth view
Second view
3-D view from
template
First view
Third view
Figure 4: Completed Gear Part Drawing
Task 1. Create drawing called gear from the default ptc_std template.
1. Click .
2. In the NEW dialog box, click Drawing , type [gear], and click O K .
3. In the NEW DRAWING dialog box, click Browse in the Default

Model section and browse to GEAR.PRT in <user home
directory> \ intro_proe_320 \ 11_drwgs_drw_templates.
4. Click Browse in the TEMPLATE section and browse to

PTC_STD.DRW as shown in the following figure.

Drawings and Drawing Templates P a g e 1 1- 1 1
NOTES
Figure 5: The New Drawing Dialog Box
5. Click OK .
6. The drawing is created with the 3-D view automatically.
Task 2. Create and orient the first view of the gear model using a
general view.
1. Click V i e w s from DRAWING menu.
2. Click General > Done to accept the default selections in the menu
manager.
3. Select in the drawing window towards the left for the general view.
Do not be too concerned with the placement; you can move the
view later.
4. Select DTM3 for the FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP
REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box.
5. Click OK to finish view creation.

NOTES
Task 3. Move the general view that you just created.
1. Click from the INTENT MANAGER.
2. Select on the view to activate it and place it at a new location.
3. Experiment with moving the view. Finally, position the view

toward the left side of the sheet.
Task 4. Add the second view as a projection view using the general
view as its parent.
1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu.
2. Leave the defaults Projection > Full View > No Xsec > No Scale .
3. Click Done .
4. Place the projection view by selecting a location above the view

you just added (General View) near the top of the sheet as shown
in the first figure of this exercise.
5. Read the message area and note that there is a conflict in the parent
view. Select the first view you added.
Task 5. Add the auxiliary view with a cross section displayed.
1. Click Add View > Auxiliary > Full View > Section > No Scale >
Done .
2. Define a cross section through the entire view. Click Full > Total
Xsec > Done .
3. Select a location to the lower right of the first view to place the
cross section view.
4. Read the message area and select DTM4 as shown in the following
figure.

NOTES
Select
DTM4
Figure 6: Orienting the Auxiliary Reference
5. The auxiliary view appears to the lower right of the general view.
Note:
This part has a previously created cross section named “C.”
The system allows you to use cross sections that have been
defined in part mode.
6. Select C from the XSEC NAMES menu.
8. Now once again click on the general view you created. This
displays the cutting arrow.
9. Click Done/Return from the VIEWS menu.
Note:
You can create cross sections in the drawing if you have a
license for the optional add-on module Pro/DETAIL.
Task 6. Change the cross-hatching to improve its display on the

drawing.
1. Click in the INTENT MANAGER if its not already selected.
2. Select the cross-hatching line as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 7: Selecting Cross-Hatching
3. Click Edit > Properties.
4. Click Spacing > Half.
5. Click once again H a l f.
6. Click Angle > 0 > Done . The resulting modified cross-hatching is

Figure 8: The Modified Cross-Hatching
Task 7. Add an isometric view.
1. Click Views > Add View > General > Scale > Done .
2. Select a location toward the upper right of the drawing to place the
view.
3. Scale the view to [.75].
4. Select DTM3 for FRONT REFERENCE and DTM2 for the TOP
REFERENCE in the ORIENTATION dialog box. Do not close the
dialog box.

NOTES
5. If you make a mistake, click Undo .
6. Click Angles from the TYPE drop-down menu
7. Click Horizontal from the REFERENCE drop-down list.
8. Type [45] for the angle followed by Apply.
9. Click Edge/Axis from the REFERENCE drop-down list.
10. Select the vertical left edge of the gear.
11. Type [30] for the angle followed by Apply.
12. Finish the orientation. Click OK from the ORIENTATION dialog

box.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2:Modifying Created Views and Testing

for Associativity
Fourth view
Second view
3-D view from
template
First view
Third view
Figure 9: Completed Gear Part Drawing
Task 1. Modify the display of hidden and tangent edges from the default
settings.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp from the MENU
MANAGER.
2. Change the display of the projected and AUXILIARY view by

selecting the SECOND view and the THIRD view shown in the
preceding figure. Click Done Sel .
3. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid > Done from the VIEW DISP menu.
4. Change the display of the general and isometric views (First and
Fourth views). Click the two views followed by Done Sel .
5. Cick Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done .

NOTES
6. Click [Wireframe display]. Click [Repaint]. Notice that

there is no change in the display of the views.
7. Click [Hidden line] to revert to hidden line display. Click .
Task 2. Projected and auxiliary views are children of their parent view.
Experiment with moving these view types
1. Click in the INTENT MANAGER.
2. Select the PROJECTED view or SECOND view and move to new

location.
3. Place the view.
4. Click Done/Return to return to the highest menu.
5. Now select the GENERAL view or FIRST view and move to new
location. Observe how the PROJECTED view and SECTION views
move in relation to the GENERAL view.
Task 3. Modify the scale value for the sheet.
1. Click Edit > Value and select the sheet scale value 1.000 on the
lower left corner of the screen, shown in the following figure.
Figure 10: Modifying Drawing Scale
2. Type [.625].
3. Change scale back to 1.000. Click Edit > Value , type [1.000].
4. Save the drawing file. Do not erase the drawing.
Task 4. Create a feature on the gear part to view the associativity

between the part model and the drawing.
1. Click and open GEAR.PRT.
2. Create a straight hole on the flat surface of the slot feature.

NOTES
Note:
You can choose the dimension and attributes of the hole, since
you are going to delete it later.
3. Activate the DRAWING window and select GEAR.DRW. Note that

the hole appears in all of the views.
4. Return to the gear part. Click Window and select GEAR.PRT.
5. Delete the hole feature.
Task 5. Erase the drawing and the part without saving the hole feature.
1. Close the GEAR PART window. Click File > Close Window .
2. Activate the GEAR DRAWING window again. Click Window and

select GEAR.DRW.
3. Save before erasing both files from memory. GEAR.DRW is used

again in the next exercise.
4. Click Erase > Current > Select All > OK . The system erases the
gear drawing.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically save to disk any
change that you have made to the model. A simple way to
revert back to the last saved version is to erase the model from
memory without saving.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Detailing the Gear Part Drawing
Figure 11: Detailed Gear Drawing with Dimensions
Task 1. To begin the detailing process, show the model dimensions.
1. Retrieve the gear drawing GEAR.DRW.
2. Click View > Show/Erase .
3. In the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, click and select View in

the SHOW BY options.
4. Now select the lower left general view (First view) on the screen.
Click Done Sel .
5. Close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box.

NOTES
Task 2. Clean up the display of dimensions.
1. Click Tools > Clean Dims in the DETAIL menu.
2. Select the first view again; then click Done Sel .
3. Clear the Create Snap Lines check box.
4. Click Apply > Close .
5. Click Done/Return in the TOOLS menu.
6. Select the 76.66 dimension with the select cursor and move it
to another location.
7. Select other dimensions and adjust them similarly.
8. Click to repaint the screen.
Task 3. Erase extra dimensions in the drawing
1. Click View > Show/Erase > Erase .
2. Click .
3. Select the two extra 6.3mm dimensions shown in the following

figure and click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu.

NOTES
Figure 12: Erasing Dimensions
4. Click Close .
5. Click to view the results.
Task 4. Enable the display of dimensions for the section view and clean
up their display.
1. Follow the same procedure to do this task as for the FIRST view.
Task 5. Create a parametric note that displays the value of the pin hole
diameter.
Note:
The system allows for notes to be displayed with the
parametric dimension within the text. This allows the note to
automatically update with changes in the dimensions.

NOTES
Figure 13: Creating a Parametric Note
1. Click Insert > Note .
2. Click Leader > Normal Ldr > Make Note leaving alone all the
other defaults from the NOTE TYPES menu.
3. In the cross section view, select the edge of the small hole as the
entity to which the system should attach the note. Use Query Sel ,
if necessary.
4. Select a location for the note. All the dimensions and parameters
change to their symbolic form.
5. Look at the lower right or cross section view and identify the
symbolic dimension representing the diameter of the small hole
(for example: symbol:d26).
6. Select the ∅ symbol from the SYMBOL PALETTE window.
7. Type [&d26 drill thru ] in the message area, then press

<ENTER>.
8. Type [one place] and press <ENTER>.
9. Save the drawing.
11. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• There are five primary Drawing View types—Projection, Auxiliary,

General, Detailed, and Revolved.
• General views are not dependent on any other view.
• General views can have their own scale.
• General views can be in any orientation and placed using the default
view, and saved views from part mode.
• Default datum planes should always be used to orient the first general
view.
• View types have four further sub-options: Full View, Half View,
Broken View, and Partial View.
• Views can be moved and deleted; their display modes can be changed
and scale values modified.
• The principle of associativity works between solid part models and
their drawings.
• Cross-sections can be created in part mode or drawing mode during
view placement.
• The majority of dimensions included on the drawing come from the
part model.
• There are two types of dimensions: Feature Dimensions and Driven
Dimensions.
• Dimensions can be manipulated.
• Drawing notes can be created to provide other information and for
documentation.

12
Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy
In this module you will learn how to duplicate features using
Pro/ENGINEER. When creating complex parts and assemblies,
often a need arises for duplication. The design intent in these cases
specifies identical features or parts to be placed at separate locations
in the same model.
Objectives
• Duplicate features using two different methods: Patterning and

Copying.
• Differentiate between Dimension Patterning and Reference
Patterning.
• Implement patterns with three different options: Identical, Varying,
and General.
• Specify different location options for the Copy feature.
• Establish dependence among various copied features.
• Use various copying techniques.
• Select features for copying.
• Specify the dependency of copied features.
• Use the Transform option to duplicate surfaces and datum curves.
Page 12-1
NOTES
CREATING PATTERNS
You can use patterns to create multiple instances of a single feature. The
original feature that you base the pattern on is referred to as the “pattern
leader.” There are two ways to define patterns:
• Increment the pattern leader’s dimensions.

• Reference an existing pattern.
If you do not increment a dimension value, the system assigns the

dimension value of the pattern leader to all instances in the pattern.
Patterning Benefits
The patterning method of feature duplication offers numerous benefits:
• A pattern behaves as a single feature.

• The pattern is parametric. Therefore, you can change pattern
parameters and regenerate.
• When you modify the dimensions of the pattern leader, the system
automatically updates the whole pattern.
• The system automatically groups all entities belonging to a pattern
together in the model tree for ease of selection.
Pattern Types
Dimension Patterns
With dimension patterning, you increment existing dimension values of
the leader in one or two directions to specify the pattern instances. If you
use the second direction, the system takes all instances that are created by
the first direction and increments them in the second direction.
Reference Patterns
With reference patterning, you reference an existing pattern to define the
locations of the new instances. This pattern type is only available if the
leader feature for the new pattern references the leader feature of the
existing pattern. This is illustrated in the following figure.

NOTES
Note:
In contrast to a dimension pattern, the system does not provide
parameters for the number of instances or increment values in
a reference pattern. It obtains this information from the pattern
that it references. A reference pattern updates automatically
when the pattern that it references changes.
A reference
pattern of a
counter-
bore hole
Figure 1: Reference Pattern
Pattern Options
There are three patterning options: Identical, Varying, and General.
Identical
Varying
General
Figure 2: Pattern Options
Pro/ENGINEER places certain restrictions on pattern options; these

restrictions are listed in the following table.

Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Patterning Restrictions
Pattern Regeneration Varying Allowing Instance

Option Speed Instances Intersections
Identical Fastest No No
Varying Moderate Yes No
General Slowest Yes Yes
1st 1st
1st
I II III
Figure 3: Pattern Parameters
I II III
Figure 4: Pattern Parameters

NOTES
1st
1st
2nd
2nd
Figure 5: Pattern in Two Directions
A B
Figure 6: Pattern in Two Directions
Creating Rotational Patterns

To create a rotational pattern for a hole, you must increment an angular
dimension using radial placement. However, for a sketched feature (such
as a protrusion, cut, or rib), you must create an internal datum plane at an
angle.

NOTES
Figure 7: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature

NOTES
Figure 8: Rotational Pattern of a Sketched Feature
Note:
Do not use a sketched centerline to create the rotational
dimension. A sketched centerline has no direction associated
with it, so the pattern results may not be consistent.

NOTES
COPYING FEATURES
Once you have created a feature, it is often more efficient to reuse it rather
than re-create it. Copying is an effective technique for duplicating multiple
features. Once you have created a feature, it is often more efficient to
reuse it rather than re-create it. Copying is an effective technique for
duplicating multiple features. The Copy feature allows you to create new
features by copying existing features to a new location. You must specify
a location for the copy, Select the features to copy, and then establish
dependence or independence for the copied feature’s dimensions.
Specifying Copy-To Locations

To select a location for the copy, click one of these options from the
COPY FEATURE menu:
• New Refs – Specifies new feature references. You can retain each
reference or click an alternate.
• Same Refs – Retains the same feature references.
• Mirror – Mirrors the features about a planar surface or datum plane.
• Move – Specifies rotation and/or translation.
Copying Methods
You can copy a feature by specifying new references, using the same
references, mirroring, and moving. Using any of these techniques, you can
specify whether the copy and the original features should share
dimensions.
Copying by Translating and Rotating Features
When copying a feature by translating or rotating it, you must specify a

reference for the direction of translation or rotation: a plane normal; a
straight curve, edge, or axis; or a coordinate system.

NOTES
Arrow shows positive rotation

using the right-hand rule.
Figure 9: Rotation
Specifying Copied Feature Dependencies

You can control the level of design intent that you capture in your model
by making the copied features dependent or independent.
• Independent –the system assigns each copied feature its own

dimensions so you can modify them without affecting the original.
Likewise, any changes that you make to the original do not affect the
copy.
Note:
If you copy a feature from a different model or version, the
system automatically makes the geometry independent.
Change to rib
height does
not affect
others.
Figure 10: Independent Copies

NOTES
• Dependent – any dimensions that were unchanged at the time of the

copy creation become dependent on the original feature. In this
example, the two dimensions specified when the copy was made are
independent. Changing one of them on the second rib only affects the
second rib. The other dimensions are dependent, so changing the value
affects both ribs.
Change to rib
height affects all
dependent
features.
Figure 11: Dependent Copies
Tips & Techniques:

If you create a copy as dependent, you can break that
dependency using the Make Indep option in the MODIFY
menu. You can make individual dimensions or the entire
section independent.
Choosing Features to Copy

To select which features to copy, select one of these options from the
COPY FEATURE menu:
• Click – Selects features to copy from the current model.

• All Feat – Selects all features in the current model. This option is
available when you select Mirror or Move .
• FromDifModel – Selects the features to copy from a different model.
This option is available when you select New Refs.
• FromDifVers – Selects the features to copy from a different version of
the current model (for example, xxxx.prt.3 when the current model is
xxxx.prt.5). This option is available when you select New Refs or
Same Refs.

NOTES
Specifying Dependency Options

To make the copied feature dimensions independent of their parent
dimension, use the Independent option. Copies that you create using the
FromDifModel and FromDifVers options are automatically independent.
To specify that copied feature dimensions (that you have not changed)
depend on the parent feature for their values, click the Dependent option.
When you create a dependent copy, you can make the entire section or
individual dimensions independent by clicking Modify and Make Indep.
Tips & Techniques:

If you use the Mirror Geom option instead of Copy , you can
mirror all of a model’s geometry about a plane without
creating new features. The system adds a Merge reference to
the Model Tree.
Before copy operation
3. Move copy
2. Same Ref copy
4 New ref
copy
1. Original model
5. Mirror copies After copy operation
Figure 12: Instances of the Copy Feature

Duplicating Features: Patterns and Copy P a g e 1 2- 1 1
NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is to duplicate geometry using patterns and copy
features.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a dimension pattern. To produce the end result,
you pattern the cut and then modify the angle of the slot.
In Exercises 2 and 3, you create a reference pattern and a rotational pattern

respectively.
In Exercise 4, you work on a model using the copy feature and mirror
geometry options.
In Exercise 5, you create mounting tabs on the steering column support

shaft by using various copy options.
Tools
Icons Description
Hidden line display
Datum Plane
Datum axis

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Dimension

Pattern
Start model Model after patterning and modifying
Figure 13: Dimensional Pattern of a Cut
Task 1. Open an existing part to be used for creating a pattern.

intro_proe_320 \ 12_duplication_features.
3. Click and open DIM_PATTERN.PRT.
4. Click [Hidden line].
Task 2. Create a varying pattern of cuts.
1. Click Feature > Pattern and select the cut.
2. Click Varying > Done .
3. Select the 10 dimension on the cut.
4. At the prompt, type [4] as the incremental value between pattern

members and press <ENTER>.
5. Click Done from the EXIT menu.

NOTES
6. Type [12] as the total number of instances in this direction and

press <ENTER>.
7. Click Done from the EXIT menu once again. Click Done from the
FEAT menu.
Figure 14 Varying Pattern
Task 3. Modify the angle of the leader to change the angle of the entire
pattern.
1. Click Modify . Select the cut. Select the 45- degree dimension and
type [-45] as the new value and press <ENTER>.
3. Save the model and erase it from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Reference Pattern
Start model Finished Model
Figure 15: Reference Pattern
Task 1. Start creating the reference pattern.
1. Open file REF_PATTERN.PRT.
Task 2. Create an identical pattern of holes in two directions.
1. Click Feature > Pattern and Select the hole.
2. Click Identical > Done .
3. Select the 20 dim ension and type [20] as the new value and press
<ENTER>.
4. Click Done from the EXIT menu.
5. Type [3] as the total number of instances.
6. Now Select the 10 dimension and type [20] and press <ENTER>.
7. Since this is the only dimension that you are going to increment in
the second direction, click Done from the EXIT menu.
8. Type [2] as the total number of instances in this direction.

NOTES
Figure 16: Identical Hole Pattern in Two Directions
Task 3. Create a square cut on the leader feature of the pattern, so that
you can create a reference pattern of it.
1. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude .
3. Select the top surface of the protrusion as the sketching plane.
4. Click O k a y from the DIRECTION menu.
5. Click Default for orientation.
6. Delete the current references in the REFERENCE dialog box.
7. Specify the axis A_1 as a reference.
Task 4. Sketch the section shown in the following figure.
1. Work on the leader figure shown, so that it can act as the reference
feature later.
2. Sketch vertical and horizontal centerlines passing through axis

A_1. This should be the only reference in the dialog box. Should
you have selected any other references by accident, delete them.
3. Sketch a square centered on axis A_1 making sure Intent Manager

makes the assumption of equal line lengths and symmetry.

NOTES
Figure 17: Section for Slot
4. Modify the width to 10mm. The model regenerates automatically.
5. Click to exit from sketcher.
6. Remove the material to the inside of the cut by selecting O k a y.
7. Click Blind > Done . Type [2.5] as the depth value.
8. Complete the feature. Click OK .
Task 5. Create a reference pattern of the cut feature.
1. Click View > Model Tree , hold mouse over the feature Cut id
1205 and . Select Pattern in the pop-up menu.
2. Define the pattern using the leader reference. Click Ref Pattern >
Done .
3. Save the part and erase it from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Rotational Patterns of

Sketched Features
Task 1. Start creating the rotational pattern
1. Open BLOWER.PRT.
2. Click [Datum plane] and [Datum axes] to display datum planes

and axes.
Figure 18: Blower Base with Dimensions Shown
Task 2. Create a horizontal/vertical reference plane for sketching, with

an angle associated with it.
3. Select the top face of the disk as the sketching plane for blower
blades.
4. Click Okay to accept the default direction.
5. Click Bottom from the SKET VIEW menu.
6. Click Make Datum from the SETUP PLANE menu.
7. Click Through ; then Query Sel to Select axis A_1.

NOTES
8. Click Angle , then Select DTM3 and click Done .
9. Click Enter Value and type [30].
10. Specify the references as the outer edge of the circular protrusion
and the datum you just created. Make sure you do not specify
DTM3 or DTM1 as a reference.
11. Sketch the section as shown in the following figure. Make sure that
the bottom straight edge has a constraint of perpendicular to the
outer edge of the base protrusion.
Pick Datum for Section

horizontal
reference
Figure 19: Sketching the Section
Tips & Techniques:

To help aid you in your sketching, you should sketch your
sections large, then modify the dimensions to change the size
of the model.
12. Add the dimensioning scheme as shown in the following figure.

Modify dimensions to the values specified and then click
[Done].
13. Accept the default Blind > Done .
14. Type [73.5] as the protrusion depth value.

NOTES
Figure 20: Sketch of Blower Blade
Task 3. Pattern the blower blade protrusion in one direction using a

varying pattern.
1. Select in model tree the protrusion you just created, >

Pattern .
2. Click Varying > Done .
3. Select dimension 30.
4. Type [60] as the increment value and press <ENTER>.
5. Do not define any other dimensions to increment. Click Done .
6. Type [6] as the number of instances for the pattern.
7. Do not create instances in the second direction. Click Done from

the EXIT menu.
8. The final pattern of blades is as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Pattern angle
Original angle
Figure 21: Pattern of Blades
9. Close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4:Copying Features
Start model Finished model
Figure 22: Copying Features
Task 1. Retrieve an existing model and copy some of the features.
1. Open the part file FEATURE_COPY_MIRROR.PRT.
2. Change the display to hidden line.
Task 2. You can make copies either independent or dependent. The

selection you make will be based on you design intent. Create a dependent
copy of the lower right slot.
1. Click Feature > Copy.
2. Click Same Refs.
3. Click Dependent > Done .
4. Select the slot. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.
5. Select the Dim 1 and Dim 3 check boxes, which are the 45-degree
angle and the 65-inch dimension respectively. Click Done .
6. For Dim 1, type [0.00] and press <ENTER>.
7. For Dim 3, type [410.00] and press <ENTER>.
8. Click OK.

NOTES
9. Click Done twice to return to the highest level menu.
Task 3. Experiment with modifying dimensions; then make the copy

independent of the parent slot.
1. Click Modify and select the parent slot.
2. Select the 125.00 dimension, type [75.00] as the new value, and
regenerate.
3. Modify the length of the slot back to 125.00, as described in the

previous step.
4. Modify the 45-degree angle of the parent slot. Type [30.00]. Note
that the angle of the copy does not change because you broke the
dependence of that dimension when you modified it to create the
copy.
5. Change the angle of the parent slot to back to 45 degrees.
Task 4. Break the dependency between the two slots.
1. Click Modify > Make Indep from the MODIFY menu.
2. Click Section from the MAKE INDEP menu.
3. Select the copy and click Done Sel and Done .
4. All of the copy’s dimensions are now independent of the parent

slot.
Task 5. You have the ability to mirror the entire model by using various
options. Mirror all of the features to complete the part using Copy.
1. Click Feature > Copy from the FEAT menu.
2. Click Mirror > All Feat > Independent from the COPY FEATURE
menu; then click Done .
3. Select DTM1.

NOTES
EXERCISE 5: Building the Steering Column
Figure 23: Steering Column Support Shaft
Task 1. Create a copy of the first tab at the bottom of the shaft 90
degrees to the first. To do this, use a move type copy.
1. Open STEERING_COLUMN.PRT.
2. Show axes and datum planes if the system is not already showing
them.
3. Click Feature > Copy > Move > Select > Dependent > Done .
4. Select the protrusion, axis, hole, and round features that compose
the first tab in the Model Tree; then click Done Sel > Done .
Round Protrusion
Axis and hole
Figure 24: Features to Copy
5. Click Translate .
6. Toggle to show datum planes and Select FRONT datum.

NOTES
7. Flip the arrow so that it is pointing in the appropriate direction.

Click O k a y.
Figure 25: Translation References
8. Type [7.5] as the translation value.
9. Click Rotate > Crv/Edg/Axis.
10. Select axis A1 as the motion reference for the rotation. (Toggle
if the axes are not visible.)
11. Point the arrow as shown in the following figure and click O k a y to
accept direction.
12. Type [90] as the rotation value.
Figure 26: Rotation Direction
13. Click Done Move to complete the move.
14. Select the 2.0 length dimension and click Done from the GP VAR
DIMS menu to complete definition of the feature.

NOTES
15. Click OK .
Task 2. Mirror the copied tab about the SIDE datum.
1. Click Feature > Copy > Mirror > Dependent > Done .
2. Select the COPIED tab from the Model Tree. Click Done .
Note:
Because the system placed the copied tab features in a group
when it copied them, you can select them as a single item.
3. Mirror the tab about the SIDE datum plane.
Figure 27: Mirrored Tab
Task 3. Make the original tab longer, and thicken the tab for strength.
Because the other two tabs are dependent copies, break their dependency
to create a thickness that is different from that of the original.
1. Click Modify . Select the protrusion (protrusion id 50) of the

original tab.
2. Change the 2.00 length to 3.00 and the 0.25 thickness to 0.375.
4. Notice that the two copied tabs also change thickness. They do not,
however, change length. This is because when you copied the first
one, you gave it a new length, which automatically made the
length dimension independent.

NOTES
Task 4. Break the thickness dependency between the tabs.
1. Click Modify > Make Indep > Dimension . Select the protrusion ID
50 again and the 0.375 thickness dimension.
2. Select the features to make the dimension independent. Notice the

2 highlighted copied tabs that are current and dependent.
3. Select both of the copied tabs from the model. Click Done Sel >
Done Sel .
4. Modify one of the copied tabs. Type [0.125] as the thickness.

Type [60] as the new value for the 90-degree rotation angle; then
regenerate.
5. Save the model.
Figure 28: Finished Steering Column Support Shaft

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Duplication is important for capturing design intent and

Pro/ENGINEER enables it through Pattern and Copy.
• Patterning is of two kinds: Dimension Patterning and Reference
Patterning.
• There are three Pattern options: Identical, Varying, and General.
• In the Rotational Pattern for a hole, the angular dimension must be
incremented using radial placement.
• Dependence/Independence can be established between copied entities.
• Copies of part geometry can be created using Move and Mirror.

13
Creating Assemblies
In this lesson you learn how to create a functional assembly of solid
components.
Objectives
In this module, you will learn to:
• Create assemblies.
• Modify assemblies.
P age 13-1
NOTES
OVERVIEW
To create an assembly you must join components (parts) by selecting
surfaces and features. There are several things to consider when building
assemblies:
• Always begin an assembly with a base component, a component that

you are unlikely to remove from the assembly later on.
• Consider how you might break down the assembly into separate
subassemblies.
• Begin your assembly with default datums.
• Add the first part or subassembly onto the default assembly datums.
Figure 1: Assembly Default Datum Templates
The Surface Normal Vector

A surface normal vector is an imaginary vector that is perpendicular to the
model surface. Pro/ENGINEER can distinguish between the outside
surface and inside surfaces that comprise your solid models.

NOTES
Figure 2: A Model’s Surface Normal Vectors
Constraining Component Parts

Placement constraints create parent/child relationships between the
assembled components and the new component that you want to add. The
following is a list of commonly used constraints:
• Mate – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite

directions and become co-planar.
Figure 3: Mate Constraint
• Mate Offset – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in opposite

directions and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.

Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3- 3
NOTES
Offset
Figure 4: Mate Offset Constraint
• Align – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same direction

and are made co-planar. Align will also make two axes co-axial.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not associate any direction to the
alignment of an axis.
Figure 5: Align Constraint
Align Offset – Normal vectors of selected surfaces point in the same

direction and are offset by a specified negative or positive value.

NOTES
Offset
Figure 6: Align Offset Constraint
• Orient – Selected surfaces, utilizing their normal vector, point in the

same direction and are parallel.
Figure 7: A Usable Reference for Orient Constraint
• Insert – Selected cylindrical surfaces of revolution become co-axial.

These surfaces do not need to be full 360-degree cylinders, as shown
in figure below.
Surfaces of revolution
Figure 8: Insert Constraint

NOTES
Placing Components
All the constraints, such as mate , align , insert , and coord sys, are
available in a single component placement dialog box. As shown in the
next figure, this allows for efficient component placement workflow.
Figure 9: The Component Placement Interface
The following features are available from the Component Placement

dialog box:
• A consolidated list of assembly constraints beginning with Automatic

provided as a drop-down list
• A Flip button to reverse a component by 180 degrees
• An editable offset value in the constraint list
• A toolbar at the top of the dialog box that allows you to:
Control whether the new component appears in the Assembly

window or new window

NOTES
Toggle between the Constraint Placement and Move dialog box

options
Fix component or place it in the default position
Access Component Interfaces
Change Preferences
Packaging Under-Constrained Components

Under-constrained components are those components which are not
completed oriented into the assembly. This means that there is some
ambiguity in the component placement that Pro/ENGINEER cannot
resolve. This situation can be resolved with packaging.
Packaging allows you to:
• Add components to an assembly without fully constraining them.

• Add components to an assembly without defining its true or final
location.
• Allocate space in an assembly for components that will be added at a
future time.
Over-Constrained Components
When you over-constrain a component, you add more constraints than is
necessary in order to capture additional design intent.
MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES
Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative, you can make changes to all
components in sub-assemblies while working in the assembly. However,
the system limits the scope of those changes through the MOD ASSEM
menu options listed below:
• Mod Dim allows you to modify any dimension in the assembly.

• Mod Assem allows you to modify only the top-level assembly
dimensions.
• Mod Subasm allows you to modify any subassembly in the top-level
assembly, which includes assembling components into the
subassembly.
• Mod Part allows you to modify parts in the assembly, which includes
modifying dimensions, redefining existing features, adding new
features, as well as most operations that you can perform at part level.

NOTES
Note
When creating part features at the assembly level, you should
use caution to avoid creating unwanted parent/child
relationships between the part and the assembly.
Modifying Your Design Intent

You can modify your design intentions with the following commands:
• Reorder– Changes the order in which the system regenerates

components in the assembly.
• Insert Mode – Inserts a component in between two components in the
regeneration cycle of the assembly.
• Reroute – Changes the external references that a component has for
constraints.
• Delete – Removes components or assembly features from the
assembly model.
• Suppress – Temporarily removes components from the assembly.
• Resume – Resumes components in the assembly model.
Saving Assemblies
When you save an assembly, the system automatically saves any changes
that you made to any of the parts in that assembly.
Note:
If you rename a part in an assembly, but the assembly is not in
RAM, the placement fails when you retrieve that assembly.
OTHER ASSEMBLY OPTIONS

Generating Bills of Material
Bills of Material (BOMs) are lists of sub-assemblies and components,
including component quantities. With Pro/ENGINEER you can generate
BOMs with the Info pull-down menu.

NOTES
Creating Exploded Views

Using the Explode option in the View pull-down menu, you can create
exploded views of the assembly model.
Note
You cannot assemble components in an exploded view. If you
try to do so, the system asks you to unexplode the assembly
using the Unexplode option in the View pull-down menu.
Figure 10: Unexploded Machine Assembly
Figure 11 Exploded Machine Assembly

NOTES
Goal
In this exercise you will learn how to create and modify assemblies.
Method
In Exercise 1, you will assemble existing components into a subassembly
by using the insert, mate, and align constraints from the component
placement interface.
In Exercise 2, you a machine crank assembly by using the subassembly

created in Exercise 1.
Tools
Table 1: Assembly Icons
Icons Description
Assemble component at default location
Show component in separate window
Specify new constraint
Remove selected constraint
Change orientation of constraint (flip)

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Create a Subassembly of Three Parts
Figure 12 Completed Base Subassembly
Task 1. Start creating the subassembly.

intro_proe_320 \ 13_creating_assemblies.
3. Click . Select Assembly and type [BASE] as the name. Make

sure Use default template is checked.
4. In the menu manager, click Set Up > Units. > millimeter Newton
Second > Set.
5. Click OK > Close .
6. Scroll the menu down by clicking the blue arrow and then click
Done to return to the high-level menu.
Task 2. Assemble the bracket part.
1. Click Component > Assemble and open BRACKET.PRT from

your working directory.
2. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click

[Assemble at default location].

Creating Assemblies P a g e 1 3- 1 1
NOTES
3. Click OK .
Task 3. Begin to assemble the bushing part to the bracket part.
1. Click Component > Assemble and open BUSHING.PRT.
2. Toggle off the datum planes.
Figure 13: Assembly of the Bushing
Task 4. Insert the bushing into the bracket using the revolved surfaces
on the models.
1. The default constraint type is Automatic in the COMPONENT

PLACEMENT dialog box.
2. Click Insert from the drop-down list.
3. Select on the outside cylindrical surface of the bushing part and

again on the inside revolved surface of the slot on the bracket part,

NOTES
Figure 14: Selecting Component References for Insert
Task 5. Mate the lip on the bushing to the back of the bracket.
1. Click Mate from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list.
2. Select on the planar flange surface on the bushing, pointed by the

cursor in the following figure.
Figure 15: Selecting References for the Mate Constraint
3. Select the back surface of the bracket using Query Sel , highlighted
in the preceding figure. Click Accept when the proper surface
highlights.

NOTES
4. Type [0 ] for the offset value and press <ENTER>.
5. You will see the results of the mate constraint.
6. Now click [Change orientation of the constraint]. You will

notice that the bushing gets flipped.
7. Click once again to the original position.
Task 6. Add a third Align constraint so that the key on the bushing lines
up with the d slot in the bracket.
1. Click [Show component in separate window].
2. The bushing part is shown in a separate window.
3. Click to add another constraint. Select the bushing key as

Figure 16: Selecting References for the Align Constraint
4. Now Select on the top surface of the bracket as shown.
5. Accept the default offset value near the message area.
6. But you don’t actually need this offset. So click on the offset value
in the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box to get a drop-down
list.

NOTES
Figure 17: Orienting the Bushing to the Bracket
7. Click Align for the constraint type and O r i e n t e d for the offset and
click OK .
8. The subassembly is fully constrained.
Note:
You can always delete constraints you have created by
clicking and specify a new constraint by clicking .
Task 7. Assemble the ring part to the bushing part using constraints.
1. Turn off the display of the datum planes.
2. Click Assemble ; then select RING.PRT
3. Zoom in on the bushing model so that you can see the snap ring
groove more clearly, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18: Base Zoomed In

NOTES
Insert references
Mate references
Figure 19: Constraints for Assembling Base with Ring
4. Add an insert constraint between the inner revolved surface of the

snap ring and the small, revolved surface of the recess in the
bushing.
5. Add a mate constraint between the front side surface of the base
and the back of the snap ring, as shown in the preceding figure.
Type [0] followed by <ENTER> as offset.
6. Click to add another constraint. Orient the tabs so they match

the orientation of the flat of the bushing. Select on the surfaces

NOTES
Figure 20: Aligning Snap Ring to the Flat of the Bushing
7. Click Align for the constraint type and O r i e n t e d for the offest in
the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
8. Click OK .
9. Click and close window.

NOTES
Exercise 2: Create the Machine Assembly

Task 1. Start creating the new assembly.
1. Click , select Assembly and type [MACHINE] as the name.

Uncheck Use default template option. Select Empty for the
template and click O K .
2. Setup the assembly to use millimeter units. Click Set Up >Units >
millimeter Newton Second > Set > OK > Close .
3. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to create three default datum plane
features.
Task 2. Assemble the base assembly into the machine assembly using
the datum planes.
1. Click Component > Assemble ; then open BASE.ASM.
2. Assemble the base subassembly to the machine assembly by
clicking [Assemble at default placement].
Task 3. Assemble the shaft component by using constraints.
1. Assemble the MASTER_SHAFT part into the machine assembly.
2. Insert the shaft into the hole in the bushing.
Figure 21: Selecting References for Align Constraint

NOTES
3. Create an Align constraint between the end surface of the shaft and
the bracket surface.
4. Specify an offset value of [100 ] and press <ENTER> .
Task 4. Add the crank part to the assembly by using the assembly
constraints.
Figure 22: Assembling the Crank Part to the Machine Assembly
1. Assemble the crank part.
2. Insert the crank into the shaft.
Figure 23 Assembled Crank
3. Align the small hole on the crank with the small hole on the shaft
by Selecting the axes.
4. The system says it is fully constrained, but orient the back of the
crank with the end of the shaft.

NOTES
Task 5. Assemble the gear component to the machine.
1. Assemble the gear part into the assembly using constraints similar
to those that you used for the crank part.
2. Save the assembly.
Task 6. While working at the assembly level, accommodate a change in

the design intent by modifying the bracket width.
1. Click Modify from the ASSEMBLY menu.
2. Click Mod Part from the ASSEM MOD menu.
3. Select the bracket part.
4. Select the base feature to display the dimensions.
5. Select the 25 dimension. Type [50.0], then press <ENTER>.
6. Regenerate only the part model.
Task 7. Accommodate another change in the design intent by adding an

edge round on the two top edges of the bracket.
1. Create a new part feature. Click Feature > Create .
2. Add a simple edge round to the bracket with a 20mm unit radius.
shows the modified bracket.
Figure 24: Modified Bracket

NOTES
Task 8. Generate a Bill of Materials for this assembly.
1. Click Bill of Materials from the INFO pull-down menu. Click O K .
2. Read the entire INFORMATION WINDOW; use the scrollbar if

necessary.
3. Click Close from the INFORMATION WINDOW
4. Close the working window.
5. Erase all models that are not displayed. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Assembly creation has to begin ideally with base components and

these usually are the Default Assembly Datums.
• There are various constraint options for adding new components to an
assembly.
• Components of an assembly can be deliberately under-constrained or
over-constrained.
• Packaged or under-constrained components are usually added to
assemblies to get a spatial feel for the completed assembly. Once the
look is right, the component can be fully constrained.
• Over-constraining occurs to capture additional design intent.
• Since Pro/ENGINEER is associative, you can make changes to all
components and sub-assemblies while working in an assembly.
• Modifying parts at the assembly level is adopting a top-down approach
to design. Sometimes this is necessary to capture the higher level
design intent by creating part geometry in the context of the assembly.
• You can extract a Bill of Materials of an assembly.
• You can create exploded views of assemblies.

14
Principles of Top-Down Design
In this module you will learn the principles of top-down design.
Robust models can be built only by the rigorous implementation of
the principles of top-down design.
Objectives
• Describe the principles of top-down design.

• List the advantages of top-down design.
• Describe the Pro/ENGINEER tools that support the top-down
design process.
• Study reference control in relation to the top-down design
approach.
P a ge 14-1
NOTES
INTRODUCTION
Definition
Top-down design is a method of designing a product by capturing top-
level design criteria first and then passing this information from the top
level of the product’s structure to all related subsystems.
Stages of Top-Down Design

• Planning
• Creating product structure
• Sharing design-critical information
• Capturing interactions between individual components
The Approach
Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing,
communicating, and managing design information. It is the best
methodology to harness and control Pro/Engineer’s associative design
tools when conceptualizing and building large assemblies.
Figure 1: Top-Down Design Architecture

P a g e 1 4- 2 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design
NOTES
Comparing Top-Down Design to Traditional

Approaches
In Top-down design the distribution of information happens from top
design levels to lower design levels.
Design
Information
Component Component Component
Figure 2: Distribution of Information from Top to Bottom
In the traditional assembly design approach, an engineer designs

individual components independent of the assembly, using a manual
approach to ensure that components fit properly and meet design criteria.
Component Component Component

Design Design Design
Assemble
Components
Figure 3: Traditional Design Approach
Characteristics of the Traditional Design Approach

• The designer places components in subassemblies and then brings
those subassemblies together to develop the top-level assembly.
• Often, after creating the assemblies, a designer discovers that the
models do not meet the design criteria (for example, a critical interface
on two models does not match).
• After detecting problems, the designer manually adjusts each model.
• As the assembly grows, detecting these inconsistencies and correcting
them consume a considerable amount of time.

Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4- 3
NOTES
Benefits of Top-Down Design Methodology

Top-down design methodology has many advantages. It can be used to
manage large assemblies, organize complex designs, control motion and
support more flexible assembly designs.
This methodology can be used to manage large assembly designs by

allowing the user to retrieve only the skeleton structure of the assembly
into memory and make desired changes. The skeleton contains the
important criteria of a design such as mounting locations, space
requirements for subsystems and parts, and design parameters such as
critical dimensions. Changes can be made to the skeleton and these
changes will be propagated to the subsystems of the entire design.
Top-down design organizes and helps enforce the interactions and

dependencies between components of an assembly. Many interactions and
dependencies exist in an actual assembly design and it is desirable to
capture these in the model of the design. An example of a desirable
dependency is the location of a mounting hole in one part and the
corresponding location in another part. Therefore, if one of the mounting
hole locations is moved, the corresponding mounting hole on the mating
part also moves. Tools exist in Model Tree design to enable users to
capture desirable dependencies while limiting undesirable ones.
An organized assembly structure allows information to be shared between

different levels of an assembly. If a change is made at one level, it is
shared among all of the other related assemblies and/or components. This
supports a team environment where different groups or individuals own
different subsystems and components. Furthermore, a complex assembly
design may be divided easily into separate tasks to be assigned to the
different team members in the early stages of a design.
THE SIX STEPS OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN

• Defining Design Intent
• Defining Preliminary Product Structure
• Introducing Skeleton Models
• Communicating Design Intent
• Continued Population of the Assembly
• Managing Part Interdependencies

NOTES
Step 1 - Defining Design Intent

All products are designed with some preliminary planning. Sketches,
ideas, proposals and specifications may exist to define the products'
purpose, function and design. This planning helps the designer understand
the product better and start the design of the system and/or detailed
components. The designer can leverage this information to begin defining
the structure of the design and detailed requirements of individual
components within Pro/ENGINEER.
Step 2 - Defining Preliminary Product Structure

The product structure consists of a list of components and their hierarchy
within the assembly design. Many of the major subsystems required for
the design will be determined when defining design intent.
The product structure can be created easily in Pro/ENGINEER allowing

the creation of subassemblies and parts without having to create any
geometry. Existing subassemblies and parts can also be added to the
product structure without actually having to be assembled.
Defining the preliminary product structure helps to organize the assembly

design into manageable tasks that can be assigned to design teams or
individual designers.
Step 3 - Skeleton Models

Skeleton models act as a 3-D layout of the assembly and may be used to
represent space requirements, important mounting locations, and motion.
Also, they can be used to share design information between subsystems
and act as a means to control the references (or interactions) between these
subsystems. Skeleton models serve a variety of purposes defining form,
fit, and function of an assembly. Some examples are:
• Space claim (form / fit)

• Component to component interface definition (fit)
• Motion representation (function)

NOTES
Step 4 - Communicating Design Intent

Top-level design information such as important mounting locations and
space claim requirements can be placed in the top-level assembly skeleton
model. This information then can be distributed to the appropriate
subassembly skeleton models as needed. This allows for each subassembly
to contain a skeleton model with only the pertinent design information for
that subassembly. This means that the subassembly design team can work
confidently on their own design since they have local access to the top-
level design criteria.
Consequently, many separate design teams can be working on their

subassembly and referencing the same top-level design information. The
result is an assembly developed concurrently that fits together the first
time.
The recommended Pro/ENGINEER tool for storing design intent at

different levels of the product structure is the skeleton model. Various
data-sharing features such as Copy Geometry and Shrinkwrap can be
used to communicate and propagate the design intent from level to level
and from model to model.
Step 5 - Continued Population of the Assembly

Once the skeletal representation of the assembly has been defined, and the
top-level design criteria have been distributed, individual component
design can begin.
Many methods exist for populating the assembly structure with detailed
parts. Existing components can be assembled, or components can be
created in the context of the assembly. These individual parts can be
related to each other using other functionality such as assembly relations,
skeleton models, layouts, and merge features to further capture design
intentions.
Step 6 - Managing Part Interdependencies

One of the greatest benefits of parametric modeling is the ease with which
designs can be changed. Methods can be used to manage the many desired
interdependencies between components of a design in an organized
manner. Managing interdependencies allows components from one design
to be used in another and provides a means for controlled change and
update of the entire assembly design.
NOTES
Tools exist in Pro/ENGINEER to help guide users in setting up the

dependencies between parts and subassemblies that will propagate the
desired changes throughout the entire design. Reference control can be
configured to limit undesired dependencies and allow desirable ones.
Furthermore, a Global Reference Viewer tool has been provided to help

users investigate and understand existing interdependencies between
components.
Note:
As the design evolves and the designers are able to obtain
more information about the design, they may need to further
define the design intent, edit the skeletons, pass the critical
data to other models and continue to populate the assembly.
This is an iterative process—one in which the design becomes
more detailed and specific throughout the project. You should,
therefore, expect to perform the sequence of steps listed above
more than once in order to complete the project.
PRO/ENGINEER TOP-DOWN DESIGN TOOLS

The following Pro/ENGINEER tools enable you to successfully capture
design intent using the top-down design approach:
Layouts
Layouts are central locations in which you can capture non-geometrical
top-level design criteria. A layout is an especially useful tool in cases
where you do not have exact information about the geometry.
Dimensions, parameters, and relations defined in a Layout can be
parametrically linked to skeletons or part models.

NOTES
Figure 4: Layout for a Race-Car Model
Figure 5: Using Layouts as a Top-Down Design Tool
Skeletons
Skeletons are central locations in which you can capture geometrical
central design information for a model. You can use skeleton models to
represent the design information in a layout in a 3-D representation. There
are three typical uses for skeletons:
• Space claim (form / fit)

NOTES
Figure 6: Using Skeletons for Space Claimes
• Component to component interface definition (fit)
Figure 7: Using Skeletons for Fit
• Motion representation (function)

NOTES
Figure 8: Using Skeletons for Motion Representation
Data Sharing Features

• Publish Geometry – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows a
designer to document the design information, making it easier for
others to later use the Copy Geometry function.
Figure 9: The Publish Geometry Dialog Box
• Copy Geometry – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to

transfer design information such as surfaces, datum planes, and datum
axes from one model to another.

P a g e 1 4- 1 0 Pro/ENGINEER Advanced Top-Down Design
NOTES
Figure 10: Accessing the Copy Geometry Feature
• Shrinkwrap – A Pro/ENGINEER feature that allows you to

‘shrinkwrap’ a model or assembly with a surface, thereby dramatically
reducing regeneration time in the recipient model.

Top-Down Design Overview P a g e 1 4- 1 1
NOTES
Figure 11: Accessing the Shrinkwrap Feature
Managing References / Interdependencies

Two functions that help the user in the sixth and ongoing step of top-down
design are Reference Control and the Global Reference Viewer
Reference Control
The Reference control dialog box allows users to define the allowable
scope for external references that the system will create. This function is
particularly useful when designing in an assembly, or when creating Copy
Geometry features.

NOTES
Figure 12: Reference Control Dialog Boxes

NOTES
Global Reference Viewer

The Global Reference Viewer is a very powerful tool that gives you the
ability to find any type of external reference between models in an
assembly. This tool is useful to ensure that only desired references have
been created, or for troubleshooting of existing assemblies.
Figure 13: Model and Global Reference Viewer Dialog Boxes

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Top down design can be conceived as an ongoing process of capturing,

communicating, and managing design information.
• There are six steps in the Top-Down Design process: Defining Design
Intent, Defining Preliminary Product Structure, Introducing Skeleton
Models, Communicating Design Intent, Continued Population of the
Assembly, Managing Part Interdependencies.
• Layouts, Skeletons, Publish Geometry, and Copy Geometry tools
enable the Top-Down Design approach.
• Managing references and interdependencies using reference control
options and the global reference viewer are an important part of the
ongoing cycles of working in models built with the Top-Down Design
principles.

15
Additional Datum Features and Skeletons
In this module you learn how to create additional datum features
like datum axes, datum curves, datum points, and datum coordinate
systems.
In addition you will be introduced to skeleton features and their
uses.
Objectives
• Describe all available additional datum features in the software

• Create additional datum features using different methods.
• Employ additional datum features as robust references for solid
geometry
• Create a basic skeleton feature
Page 15-1
NOTES
ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES

Datum features are mass-less, non-solid features that can be used as
references and as parents to solid geometry. All datum features serve the
purpose of construction type geometry.
Datum Axes
Datum axes appear as dashed yellow lines that often have name-tags such
as A_1 , A_2 , and A_3 .
Uses
• As centers of coaxial holes
• As references for assembly constraints
• As aids for the creation of other datum features
Methods of Creation
• Thru Edge – Created through a straight edge of the model
• Normal Pln – Normal to a selected surface with linear dimensions to
two references
• Pnt Norm Pln – Normal to a selected surface and though a datum
point
• Thru Cyl – Created through the “imaginary” center of any surface of
revolution
• Two Planes – Created at the intersection of two planes
• Two Pnt/Vtx – Created through two datum points or two vertices of
the model
• Point on Surface – Goes through a point normal to the surface
• Tan Curve – Created tangent to a datum curve or at the end point of a
model’s edge
Datum Curves
Datum curves appear on the model as orange lines. They can be straight or
curved and open or closed loops.

NOTES
Uses
• As trajectories for swept features
• To help define the shape of assembly skeletons
• To aid in surface creation
• To measure features of a model
Methods of Creation
• Sketch – Uses sketcher functionality to create the curve on a flat
surface.
• Intr . Surf – Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.
• Thru Points – Create a curve through a series of datum points.
• Projected – Projects a 2D curve onto a solid surface.
• Formed – Transfers a datum curve onto a surface as a formed curve.
The formed curve preserves the length of the original curve.
• 2 Projection – Creates a projected datum curve from two sections on
non-parallel sketching planes.
• From Equation – Creates a curve based of mathematical equations.
Datum Points
Datum points appear as small yellow “x ”s on the model, with name tags
such as PNT1
Uses
• Help in creating datum curves and datum axes.
• Used when creating holes that are placed on point.
• Used as references for assembly constraints.
Methods of Creation
• On Surface – Creates a point on a selected surface using linear
dimension to two references
• On Vertex – Point is defined at a vertex on the solid model
• Offset Csys – Points are defined offset from a coordinate system
using Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinates
• At Center – Creates a point at the center of an arc or a circle

Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5- 3
NOTES
• On Curve – Creates a point along a datum curve or model edge with

the following dimensional options.
Offset – Places a point on the curve offset at a distance from a
planar surface.
Length Ratio – Places a point on the curve as a percentage of
the overall length (0.0 and 1.0 are the start and end points of
the curve).
Actual Length – Places the point using the actual arc length
distance of the curve.
• Field Point – Places a free-floating point on a selected reference such
as a surface or a curve.
Datum Coordinate Systems

Datum Coordinate Systems appear yellow on the model and usually have
nametags, such as CS1. Each axis on the coordinate system is also labeled
(x,y,z).
Uses
• Ability to define a zero position for datum points read in from file.
• Orientation for manufacturing procedures.
• References for assembly constraints.
Methods of Creation
• 3 Planes – Origin at the intersection of three planes.
• Pnt + 2Axes – Origin at a datum point, vertex, or origin of another
datum coordinate system.
• 2 Axes – Origin at the intersection of two axes, straight edges or
straight datum curves.
• Default – Origin at the first vertex of the base feature.

NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is to create additional datum features and use them
as references to solid geometry.
Method
In Exercise 1, you start with the default datums and a datum coordinate
system included in any new part. Then you create datum points and a
datum curve to create a door handle.
In Exercise 2, you use several datum features to create a simple skeleton.
In Exercise 3, you open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.
Tools
Table 1: Additional Datum Features
Icons Description
Insert datum coordinate system
Insert datum points
Insert sketched curve
Insert datum curve
Insert datum axis

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Additional Datum Features.

Task 1. Create a new part and define the control points for the handle.

intro_proe_320 \ 15_addtl_dtm_feats_skels .
3. Create a new part with the name DOOR_HANDLE.
Task 2. Since we already have a coordinate system, we will create

points at x, y, z positions relative to it.
1. Click [Insert datum points] from the sidebar and click Offset
Csys from the DATUM POINT menu.
2. Select the PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate system from the model

tree.
3. Click Cartesian as the coordinate type.
4. Click Enter Points and type [0] for x, [0] for y, and [0] for z.
Task 3. Once the first datum point’s x, y, z positions have been defined,
enter in the x, y, z data for the other points.
1. Create a second datum point at 4,0,0. Enter [4], [0], [0] at the
prompt.
2. Create a third datum point at 4,16,0. Enter [4], [16], [0] at the
prompt.
3. Create a fourth datum point at 0,16,0. Enter [0], [16], [0] at the
prompt.
4. Once the coordinates of the last point have been entered, type
<ENTER> on a blank line.
5. Click Done to complete the feature. The part should look as shown
in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 1: Datum Points
Task 4. Create a datum curve through these points. The order the points
are created does matter because the curve will connect them in that order.
1. Click [Insert datum curve], click Thru Points > Done .
Task 5. Define a specific radius that the curve will take through each
point.
1. Click Single Rad, and select PNT1. Type [1.0].
2. Click Done Sel > Done .
3. Click OK to finish the feature
Task 6. Create a swept protrusion as the door handle geometry. The

trajectory is the datum curve that you created.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Sweep.
2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain.
3. Select the datum curve; then click Select All > Done > Okay.
4. Define a 1.0 inch diameter circle as the cross-section, centered at

the intersection of the centerlines.

NOTES
5. Click .
6. Click OK to finish the feature. The final part should look as shown
Figure 2: Final Solid Geometry

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a simple skeleton

Task 1. Create a datum curve.
1. Create a new part called LINK_SKEL using the default template.
2. Select the FRONT datum plane and click [Insert sketched

datum curve].
3. Sketch the following three line segments.
Figure 3: Sketching Three Lines
4. Click .
Task 2. Create points at the vertices
1. Click [Insert datum points] > On Vertex , then select the

vertices shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 4: Selecting Vertices
Task 3. Create axes through the points
1. Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pln and select the
FRONT datum plane and PNT0. Then click Done Sel > Done .
2. Click [Insert datum axis] > Pnt Norm Pln and select the
FRONT datum plane and PNT1. Then click Done Sel > Done .
Note:
To accept default selections that the system provides such as
Done Sel and Done , you may also use for ease of use.
3. The model is as shown in the following figure. (The tags for the
points and axes have been turned off for clarity)

NOTES
Figure 5: Sketched Preliminary Model
Task 4. Create two additional datum planes
1. Click [Insert datum plane] > Though and select the curve
Figure 6: Creating a Through Datum Plane
2. Click Parallel and select the RIGHT datum plane and click Done .
3. Click > Though and select the diagonal curve.

Additional Datum Features and Skeletons P a g e 1 5- 1 1
NOTES
4. Click Normal and select the FRONT datum plane and click Done .
Task 5. Create a coordinate system
1. Click [Insert datum coordinate system] > Orig+Zaxis > .

Then select the vertex as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7: Selecting Vertex
2. Select DTM1 and O k a y to accept the direction for the Z-axis.
3. Click Plane Norm , select the FRONT datum and click Flip >
O k a y to accept the direction for the X-axis.
Figure 8: Creating Normal Plane
4. Turn off the display of .
5. Select the datum curve and click > Modify .

NOTES
6. Select the 40.0 dimension, modify to [15.0], and Regenerate .
Figure 9: Regenerated Model
7. Notice the planes, points, axes, and csys have updated with the
changes.
8. Modify the overall height dimension back to [40.0] and

Regenerate .

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: The Link Skeleton in an assembly

Task 1. Open and ‘flex’ an assembly with a skeleton.
1. Open LINK_SKEL.ASM, and turn off the display of datum features.
Figure 10: Link Assembly
2. Notice that the LINK_SKEL (from the last exercise) has been
assembled as a skeleton in this assembly. The three solid models
have been assembled to the skeleton.
Task 2. Make modifications to the skeleton.
1. Select the Link_Skeleton from the model tree, and click >
Modify , then select the curve as shown in the following figure.
Figure 11: Selecting Curve to Modify

NOTES
2. Select the 40.0 dimension, modify to [15.0], and Regenerate >

Automatic.
Figure 12: Model with Modified Dimensions
3. Notice that the components move with the skeleton.
4. Modify the overall height dimension to [48.0], and Regenerate >

Automatic.
Figure 13: Model with Further Modified Dimensions

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: The Vice Grip

Task 1. Open a partially finished model consisting of datum features.
Create additional features to complete the ‘skeleton’.
1. Open VICE_GRIP.PRT.
2. Select the FRONT datum plane and click .
3. Select the two default references and click Delete.
4. Display ONLY Axes and points.
5. Select axis A_1 and the two points for references as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 15: Creating References

NOTES
Task 2. Sketch the following curve.
Note:
If you have difficulty creating the sketch, you may wish to
open the completed vice-grip model.
Figure 16: Sketching a Model
1. After completing the sketch, click and select the 45°

dimension.
2. Increase the sensitivity slider to its maximum and scroll the thumb-
wheel approximately between 45° and 15°. Notice how the curves
work together to form a ‘linkage’. The following figure has the
angle modified to 18°.

NOTES
Figure 17: Modified Angle
3. This ‘skeleton’ model now could be used to either design parts

from as part of a top-down design process, or models could be
directly assembled to simulate motion.
4. Complete the feature, save the model, and erase it from memory.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that
• Additional Datum features are convenient and hassle-free features that

aid model creation.
• Datum features are mass-less and non-solid; therefore, they can be
deployed frequently when creating solid geometry.
• Datum Axes are created for all types of revolved features, holes, and
extruded circles.
• Datum Curves often aid in surface creation using sketcher
functionality.
• Datum Points are used as references for assembly constraints and to
place holes on point when they are created.
• Datum Coordinate Systems are used for orientations in manufacturing
procedures.

16
Layers and Suppression
In this module you will learn how to use layers. Layers enable you to
organize model components – features, datum planes, and parts – so
that you can perform operations on those items collectively.
Typical operations you might perform with layers include
manipulating the model view by displaying or blanking, selecting,
suppressing, and so on.
Objectives
• Create layers for a given model.

• Associate items to a layer.
• Manipulate layer display status.
• Control data with the suppression function.
• Re-work existing parent/child relationships.
• Resume suppressed features.
Page 16-1
NOTES
DEFINING LAYERS
Functionality
• Layers provide a means of organizing object items into related groups
to avoid confusion
• They allow you to perform certain collective operations on groups of

items such as features in a part, components in an assembly, draft
items on a drawing, even other layers.
• Using layers, you can control the information that the system displays
on the screen
• Layers enable certain actions as deletion, plotting, and suppression for

certain items.
Working With Layers

• If you use a default template, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
associates the different features of a model to specific default layers.
For example,

NOTES
Figure 1: Default Layers when Creating New Models from Template
• You can create additional default layers using two methods. The first
is through the Config file and the second is by using the def layers
command from the Layer pull-down menu in the LAYERS dialog box.
• A single item can be associated with multiple layers.
• You can have as many layers as needed or none at all.
CREATING LAYERS
Selecting the Object
The active object is the model in which you actually create the layers and
make changes. The principle is to associate those items to a layer that exist
at the layer level. For example, if you select the top-level assembly as the
active object, you can associate only items from the top-level assembly to
a top-level assembly layer.

Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6- 3
NOTES
Note:
In Drawing mode, you can select either the model or the
drawing as the active model.
Creating Layers
• Pro/ENGINEER identifies layers by name only.
• You can express the name in numeric or alphanumeric form, using a
maximum of 31 characters.
• After you have established the active model, you can define a new
layer by clicking the .
• Once you have typed one layer name you can create multiple new
layers by simply typing a new name and pressing <ENTER>.
Associating Items to a Layer

Once you have created layers, you can associate items to them
automatically as well as manually.
For example in the following figure, you can associate axis to a new layer
automatically by selecting from the Default Layer Types. Similarly other
feature-types can also be associated either to the same layer or to another
layer.
Figure 2: New Layer Dialog Box

NOTES
Using options in the LAYER dialog box, you can associate items to and
remove them from selected layers manually as well. You can copy them or
switch them from one layer to another.
Table 1: Item Types

Component Select component parts and/or assemblies. Click All
(Assembly mode only) Instances or Individual in the LAYER COMP menu.
Feature • Click the following feature options in the
LAY FEAT menu:
• Select – Specifies the particular feature.
• Range – Specifies a range of features.
• – Specifies a feature type from the
All of Type
ALL FEATURES menu.
• Feat/Child – Specifies a feature and all of its
children.
Curve Select a datum curve.
Quilt Select a quilt.
2-D Items Select detail items.
Text Select nametags for datum planes, axes, points, and
coordinate systems. When text tags are blanked, Click
Sel By Menu, or select from the MODEL TREE
Point Select a datum point.
Datum Plane Select a datum plane.
Layer Select a layer. Creates a layer hierarchy with sub-layers.
Solid Geometry Select a feature. Blanks all solid features of the part.
Note:
If you attempt to associate an item to a layer that does not exist
in the active model, the system identifies the native model for
the item. You can select or create a layer in the native model,
or ignore the selection of that item.
Setting the Display Status of a Layer

One of the main reasons that you would organize items using layers is to
control the kind of information that the system displays on the screen for
that particular object. You can perform the following procedures, as
illustrated in the following figure:
NOTES
• Show selected layers on the screen.

• Blank selected layers from the screen by removing them.
• Isolate selected layers by displaying them on the screen and removing
all non-isolated layers from the screen.
• Hide components associated to the selected layer by displaying them
entirely as hidden lines when working in Hidden Line mode, or
remove them from the screen when working in No Hidden mode (in
Assembly mode only). The Hide display status has no effect when the
environment setting is Wireframe .
Figure 3: Layer Display Dialog Box
Not all layer items are available for manipulation in every

Pro/ENGINEER mode.

NOTES
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of a layer by
default when it saves the object. The next time that you
retrieve the object, the display status reverts back to Show for
all layers. If you want to save the display status with the
object, you must click Save Status from the LAYER
DISPLAY dialog box.
Manipulating Layer Display Status

In the following figure you create layers in Part mode and Assembly
mode, associate items to them, and vary the display status of the items.
In Part mode, you have a protrusion and three datum planes.
• Create the layers PROT, DATUM_A and DATUM_B.

• Associate the protrusion to the PROT layer.
• Associate datum plane A to the DATUM_A layer.
• Associate datum plane B to the DATUM_B layer.
• Do not associate datum plane C to any layers.
In Assembly mode, you have three components (A, B, and C) and two
assembly datum planes.
• Create layers COMP_B, COMP_C and ADATUM_A.

• Associate component B to the COMP_B layer.
• Associate component C to the COMP_C layer.
• Associate assembly datum plane A to the ADATUM_A layer.
• Do not associate component A and assembly datum plane B to any
layers.

NOTES
Part Mode
B C
A
Assembly
Mode
D E F
Figure 4: Illustration of Layer Display Status
• A – All layers have a display status of S h o w n .

• B – PROT: Blank ; DATUM_A: Shown; DATUM_B: Blank
• C – PROT: Shown ; DATUM_A: Shown; DATUM_B: Isolate
• D – All layers have a display status of Show .
• E – COMP_B: Blank ; COMP_C: Show ; ADATUM_A: Blank
• F – COMP_B: Isolate ; COMP_C: Show ; ADATUM_A: Show
SUPPRESSION FUNCTIONALITY
• Suppression temporarily removes a feature or component from the
model
• The system does not regenerate the item, and the model appears as if
you had never created the item.
• When you suppress items, you can resume them at a later date.
Suppress differs from delete in that it is not permanent.
Using Suppression
• To simplify the model
• To reduce regeneration time

NOTES
• To reduce screen repaint time

• To use design alternatives
Suppressing Parent/Child Relationships

If you suppress a feature or a component that has children and do not
select the children as well, Pro/ENGINEER requires you to do one of the
following:
• Reroute the child references.

• Change the dimensioning scheme of the child.
• Suppress the child.
• Suspend action on the child until you regenerate the model.
• Freeze the component (in Assembly mode only).
Saving and Resuming Suppressed Features

You can save a model with suppressed features and/or components. When
you retrieve or regenerate it, Pro/ENGINEER informs you that it has
suppressed items.
When you resume or regenerate suppressed features, the system returns

them to their original location in the feature list. You can resume them by
selecting them from the MODEL TREE window or using one of the
following options in the RESUME menu:
• All – Resumes all items that are currently suppressed.

• Layer – Resumes items by layer.
• Last Set – Resumes the last group of suppressed items.
• Feat ID – Resumes items by specifying the feature ID of the item.

NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is to use layers for organizing items in a model. You
will also use the suppression function to remove items from a model
temporarily.
Method
In Exercises 1 and 2, you learn to control the information that the system
displays in a part model and an assembly model. You learn to use layers to
control the display of the datum planes and axes of the part in Exercise 1,
as opposed to turning their display off.
In Exercise 3, you suppress a feature in a part.
In Exercise 4, you experiment with suppressing a component in an

assembly.
Tools
Table 2: Layers Icons
Icons Description
Saved views list
Create layers
Add item to selected layer

Layers blanked
Show layers
Select all
Unselect all

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers in Part Mode
Figure 5: Layer Crank Part
Task 1. Retrieve the crank part; then shade and spin the model.

intro_proe_320 \ 16_layers_suppression.
3. Click [File open] to open LAYER_CRANK.PRT.
4. Shade the model if it is not already so.
Task 2. Create two layers called DATUMS and AXES.
1. Click [Saved views list]. There’s only one Default view here.
2. Click View > Layers and click [Create layers].
3. Type [DATUMS], then click Add .

Layers and Suppression P a g e 1 6- 1 1
NOTES
4. Type [AXES], then click O K .
Task 3. Associate the default datum planes to the datum layer.
1. Select the Datums layer from the layers list. Make sure the A x e s
layer is not highlighted.
2. Click the [Add item to selected layer].
3. Click Datum Plane from the LAYER OBJ menu.
4. Select DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 from the MODEL TREE, then -
click Done Sel > Done/Return
Task 4. Associate the axes of the part to the axes layer.
1. Unselect layer Datums and select layer A x e s.
2. Click the icon and click Feature from the LAYER OBJ menu.
3. Click Query Sel . Select the A_1 boss protrusion. Accept the
selection.
4. Now Select A_5 and the cross-hole protrusion. Accept the

selection.
5. Click Query Sel . Select axis A_2 . Accept the selection.
6. Click Done Sel > Done Return > Done Return .
Task 5. Use the LAYER dialog box to see the features you associated
with layers.
1. Click Show > Layer Items.
2. Tree > Expand >All .
Task 6. Change the display status of the two layers you just created.
1. Click A x e s and Datums in the LAYERS dialog box
2. Click and then click .

NOTES
3. The system no longer displays the datum planes and axes on the
screen, but they still exist. You can verify this by using the
MODEL TREE.
4. Close the LAYERS dialog box.
5. Save the model and close the window
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not save the display status of the layers
unless you click Save Status prior to exiting the LAYERS
dialog box.
Figure 6: Layer Display Status Set to Blank

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Layers in Assembly Mode
Figure 7: Layers Assembly
Task 1. Open an existing assembly and define two layers at the top-
level assembly called crank and gear.
1. Open the PINION.ASM.
2. Click View > Layers and click [Create layers].
3. Type [CRANK] and press <ENTER>.
4. Type [GEAR], then click O K .
Task 2. Associate the crank part to the CRANK layer and the Gear part
to the GEAR layer.
1. Unselect the GEAR layer and select the CRANK layer.
2. Click .
3. Click Component from the LAYER OBJ menu.

NOTES
4. Click Individual from the LAYER COMP menu.
5. Click Sel By Menu , then select LAYER_CRANK.PRT.
6. Finish the association. Click Done Sel > Done/Return >

Done/Return .
7. Repeat the steps above to associate the gear part to the gear layer
Task 3. Blank the crank and gear layers.
1. Select the crank and gear layers.
2. Click [Blank layers].
3. Repaint the screen and turn off the datum planes and axes.
4. The system no longer displays the layer crank and layer gear
components on the screen.
Figure 8: Layers Blanked from Display
Task 4. Verify that the components still exist.
1. Click Info > Feature List .
2. Click Top Level > Apply.
3. Read the information window and close the information window and
the FEATURE LIST dialog box.

NOTES
Task 5. Set the gear model to hidden line display.
1. Click [Hidden line].
2. Click View > Layers.
3. Click G e a r in the LAYERS dialog box.
4. Click from the LAYERS dialog box.
5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the component on the

screen again.
Task 6. Determine the effect that other environment settings have on the
Hidden Line setting for the layer.
1. Click .
Figure 9: Hidden Line Display Mode
2. Click from the toolbar.

NOTES
Figure 10: No Hidden Display Mode
Note
The icons next to the layer names in the dialog box indicate the
current status of the layers. If [Show layers] next to the
layer name is gray, then some of the layers of the same name
in assembly sub-components have varying display statuses set
Task 7. Determine the status of the datums layer.
1. In the LAYERS dialog box.
2. Click Show > Layer Items.
3. Expand the datums layer items. Click the + icon next to DATUMS.
4. Notice all the models have a layer called DATUMS, but only some
of them are blanked.

NOTES
Task 8. Set both layers back to S h o w n.
1. Click the [Select all] icon from the LAYERS dialog box
2. Click .
3. Repaint the screen.
4. All components and their datums should be visible again. If the

datums and axes are not visible, check the environment icons in the
toolbar,
Task 9. You have the ability to effect the display of layers within all
levels of the assembly, as well as associate items at any level. Change the
display of all the part level datum planes.
1. Click [Unselect all].
2. Select all the entries under Datums , except IN_LAYER_BASE.ASM.
3. Click .
4. Repaint the screen. The system no longer displays the datum

planes of the parts on the screen, but does display the assembly
datums.
Task 10. Add the layer called Datums at the top level and associate the
default datums of the assembly.
1. Click .
2. Type [asm_datums], then click OK
3. Select the datums layer and click .
4. Select the three assembly level datum planes in the PINION.ASM.
5. Complete the association. Click Done Sel , then click Done/Return

from the LAYER OBJ menu.

NOTES
Task 11. Save the display status of the datum planes for the next time
that you retrieve the assembly, or any of the associated components,
1. Click Save Status from the LAYERS dialog box.
2. Click Close .
4. Erase the assembly from memory and all associated objects.
Figure 11: Top-Level Default Datum Planes

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Suppressing in Part Mode

In this exercise, you suppress a feature to make it easier to retrieve and
regenerate the part.
In the following figure, each hole has a cut that represents the threads;
therefore, it requires a great deal of time to retrieve and regenerate it. For
this design you only need the threads for mass property calculations, and
not for other operations.
Figure 12: PLATE.PRT with Threaded Notes
Task 1. Modify the circular protrusion which comes before the helical
threads in the regeneration list of the start model.
1. Open the part named PLATE.PRT, note the amount of time the
system uses to retrieve the part.
2. Modify the height of the circular boss to 10mm. Click Modify and
Select the boss protrusion. Select the 5 dimension and type[10].
3. Regenerate the part. Note the amount of time that the system
requires to update the geometry.
Task 2. Suppress the complex thread cuts.
1. Click Feature > Suppress from the menu manager.
2. Select the pattern of cuts from the MODEL TREE.

NOTES
3. Click Done Sel from the GET SELECT menu. Click Done from
the SELECT FEAT menu.
4. Note that the cuts are no longer in the model. Verify this by
checking in the MODEL TREE.
Task 3. Once a feature is suppressed, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider

it as existing in the model. Test the speed that the system regenerates the
model without the threads in the model.
1. Click Done from the FEAT menu.
2. Change the height of the circular boss back to 5. Click Modify and
Select the 10 dimension, then type [5].
3. Regenerate the part. Note that the system updates the model much
faster now.
Figure 13: Thread Cuts Suppressed

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Suppressing Components in

Assembly Mode
Figure 14: Alternate Components
Task 1. Suppress the crank components in the assembly to see what the
assembly will look like with a different crank part.
1. Open the SECOND_PINION.ASM,
2. Click Component from the ASSEMBLY menu. Click Suppress

and Select the crank part.
3. Click Done Sel > Done . Note that the system no longer includes
the component in the assembly.

NOTES
Task 2. You can assemble different components to test their

compatibility with an assembly design. Assemble a model to replace the
crank.
1. Click Component > Assemble and double-click

HAND_CRANK.PRT
2. Click Align from the constraint drop-down list in the

COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
3. Select axis A_1 of hand crank model.
4. Select axis A_1 of shaft model.
Figure 15: Axes Aligned
5. Select Align for the second constraint.
6. Select axis A_5 of hand crank model.
7. Select axis A_3 of shaft model.
8. Finish the placement.
9. Read the message in the message area, then click O K .
10. Close the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box.
Task 3. Suppress the hand crank model.
1. Click Suppress .
2. Select the HAND_CRANK using the MODEL TREE.

NOTES
3. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu to complete the

operation.
Task 4. Constrain the wheel crank to the end of the shaft.
1. Click Assemble . and double click the WHEEL_CRANK.PRT
2. Click Align from the CONSTRAINT TYPE drop-down list.
3. Align A_1 of wheel crank with axis A_1 of shaft model
4. Align axis A_5 of wheel crank model with axis A _ 3 of shaft

model.
5. Finish the placement
Task 5. With components suppressed you can easily switch between

representations of the assembly to test which one is the most plausable.
Suppress the third crank model and resume the original one
1. Suppress the wheel crank component. Click Suppress and Select

the wheel crank part. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu.
2. List the suppressed components in the MODEL TREE. Click View

> Model Tree Setup > Item Display
3. Select Suppressed Objects and click O K
4. Resume the original layer crank component. Right mouse click the
LAYER_CRANK.PRT entry in the MODEL TREE, and select
Resume from the pop-up menu.
Task 6. Suppression temporarily removes a component from the

assembly. A suppressed model is still associated to the assembly. Resume
the suppressed components; then permanently delete them from the
assembly.
1. In the MENU MANAGER, click Component > Resume > All >
Done
2. Click Delete > Clip
3. Select only the hand crank part from the MODEL TREE.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

You can use the MODEL TREE to delete suppressed features
or components without resuming them first.
5. Save the model and click File > Close Window ..

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• The Layers feature is designed for greater flexibility of models and

less clutter.
• Items have to be deliberately associated to specific layers of a model.
• Any number of layers can be created.
• The display status of a layer can be set to Hidden
• Suppression of features in a part and of components in a model leads
to greater maneuverability in design.
• Suppressed features can effect the parent/child relationship.
• Suppressed features can be resumed.

17
Creating Surfaces with Freeform
Interactive Surface Design in Pro/ENGINEER (also referred to as
“ISDX”) adds many new features to Pro/ENGINEER surface
modeling. In this module you learn some of the ways to use ISDX,
including an overview of the Style feature.
Objectives
• Describe the capabilities of ISDX.

• Explain the use of the new hybrid modeling paradigm.
• Describe how to use the tools and menus to create Style features.
• Describe how to use the single- and quad-view window layouts.
• Create 2-D and 3-D freeform curves.
• Create freeform surfaces using boundary curves.
Page 17-1
NOTES
DESIGNING WITH INTERACTIVE SURFACES

ISDX offers a spline-based freeform modeler that allows you to create 2-D
and 3-D curves and freeform surfaces. You can use ISDX to create
freeform surface models for:
• Conceptual design
• Engineering design
• Reverse styling
ISDX enables you to create STYLE features. Within the Style feature, you
can create freeform curves and surfaces easily.
THE STYLE FEATURE

A Style feature can contain several curves and surfaces or quilts. It
appears in the MODEL TREE as Style.
Figure 1: The Style feature in the Model Tree

NOTES
Figure 2: A Style feature Containing Several Curves and Surfaces
The Style feature opens up a new modeling environment with a single or

four-view window layout.
Figure 3: Four-View Window Layout
HYBRID MODELING
Most products are a combination of geometric forms and freeform shapes.
Style offers a unique situation where you can integrate the traditional
feature based parametric modeling of Pro/ENGINEER with freeform
unconstrained surfacing. You can create freeform curves and surfaces that
can reference other geometric features.

Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7- 3
NOTES
Any change in a parametric model regenerates the Style features allowing

you to freely mix unconstrained freeform surfaces with geometrical
parametric surfaces.
This unique situation also allows you to carry out total product design in a
single modeling environment.
CREATING SURFACES WITH ISDX

You can use ISDX to create curves and freeform surfaces where geometry
is either not defined or requires great flexibility. Also, you can use it when
the design intent is dependent on visual or aesthetic criteria.
Specifically, you can use ISDX to create:

• 2-D and 3-D curves (referenced or unconstrained)
• Curves On Surface (COS)
• Styling design models
• Blends and transition surfaces
• Freeform surfaces along with parametric surfaces in engineering
design models
• Reverse styling surfaces
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves

You can use Style as a 2-D or 3-D sketcher to create unconstrained or
referenced curves. These curves can be attached to features like points,
curves, or edges and so on, and can be used to create Style or other
Pro/ENGINEER features.

NOTES
Figure 4: Defining Curves in 3-D Space
Figure 5: A Blend Surface based on a Freeform 3-D Curve
Figure 6: Surfaces Created from 3-D Curves

NOTES
Using COS
You can create Curve on Surface (COS) by sketching them directly on to
the base surface or by using the Drop tool. Style allows easy manipulation
or modification of the COS in order to capture the design intent. You can
use COS to build further surfaces or to trim the surfaces.
Figure 7: Using COS for Trimming
Creating Styling Models

You can use freeform, intuitive curves and surfaces to conceptualize
products. Conceptualizing in ISDX allows you to access the inside
engineering components directly in the same part or assembly while
designing outer body shapes.
You can also model using concept images that can be applied on to base
surfaces as shown in the following figure.
(A) (B)

NOTES
(C)
Figure 8: (A) Sketch (B) Sketch Applied on to the Base Surface (C) Model Developed
Using the Sketch
Creating Freeform Surfaces with Parametric

Controls
While designing products you may need to impose dimensional controls
on freeform surfaces. ISDX allows freeform curves and surfaces to
reference with parametric curves or surfaces, enabling you to control the
freeform surfaces using dimensions.
Figure 9: Dimensionally Controlling a Style Model

NOTES
Creating Blends and Transitions

You can use Style to create quick and high quality spline blends to
improve the aesthetics or smoothness of products.
Figure 10: Typical Transition Surfaces
Figure 11: Interactive Manipulation of Tangency
Applying Style Surfaces to Engineering Models

You can combine Style surfaces with parametric surfaces while creating
high curvature or transition surfaces.
Figure 12: High Curvature Transition Surfaces

NOTES
Reverse Styling
You can conveniently refer to imported scan curves and faceted or surface
data to build Style curves and surfaces.
Figure 13: Reverse Styling
CREATING STYLE SURFACES

You can create Style surfaces using any four touching boundaries. For this
purpose, Style curves, datum curves and edges as boundaries can be used
as shown in the following figure
Figure 14: Style Surfaces from Four Touching Boundaries

NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is to use the Style interface and create simple style
surfaces.
Method
In Exercise 1, you redefine a Style feature created in a PDA model. You
navigate through menus, shortcut menus and tool bars and also set
different view orientations.
In Exercise 2, you create surfaces for a flashlight part by connecting four

style curve boundaries.
Tools
Table 1: ISDX Icons
Icons Description
Set active datum plane
Create and edit curves
Display curvature plot
Clear curvature plot
Regenerate all
Create surfaces from boundary curves

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Interrogating the STYLE Interface

Task 1. Experiment with an existing Style feature.

intro_proe_320 \ 17_surfaces_freeform.
3. Open PALM.PRT.
Note:
The ‘LCD screen’ is actually a *.jpg image applied on the
model in Pro/E as a texture.
4. In the MODEL TREE, click STYLE id 89 and click >

Redefine .
5. Notice the Style working environment and particularly the new

tools added to the interface as shown in the following figure.

Creating Surfaces with Freeform P a g e 1 7- 1 1
NOTES
Figure 16: The Style Tool Bars
6. The grid displayed on the TOP plane indicates that TOP is set as
the active plane.
7. Click View > Active Plane Orientation . The TOP is set parallel to
the screen.
8. In the window, > Default Orientation.
Task 2. Change the window layout.
1. Click View > Show All .
2. Click Styling > Set Active Plane . Select the Oblique plane from
model tree.

NOTES
3. In the top left window, > Active Plane Orientation from the
pop-up menu.
4. Rotate the model randomly in any window.
5. Click View > Default Orientation to reset all the windows.
6. Click anywhere in the window and then > Show All .
7. Reset the active plane. Right-click S e t Active Plane and select the
TOP plane.
8. Press <CNTRL> + <D> to get to the default orientation.
Task 3. Familiarize yourself with the Style preferences.
1. Click and .
2. Click Utilities > Styling Preferences.
3. Change the spacing of the grid. In the grid area of the dialog box,
type [15] and press < ENTER> .
Figure 17: Changing Grid Spacing
4. In the Display area of the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box,

clear the Grid checkbox.
5. In the Surface Mesh area, move the quality slider to the right to
make the mesh dense.

NOTES
6. Click [Shading].
7. In surface mesh area, click On to display mesh on the shaded

model.
Figure 18: Displaying Mesh on Shaded Model
8. Display the model without the curve and mesh display. Click View
> Shade .
9. Close the STYLING PREFERENCES dialog box.
10. Click [Repaint].
Task 4. Familiarize yourself with the selection procedure.
1. Click close to the cluster of curves as shown in the following

figure.
Click here to
select a curve
Figure 19: Selecting a Curve

NOTES
2. Click > Next from among the many commands in the pop-up
menu.
3. Choose entities from the selection bin. Right-click Show Sel Bin .
In the SELECTION dialog box, click Style: (1) Curve:CF-116 .
4. Exit the Style feature, click
5. Close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Handle on the Flashlight

Task 1. Add a Style feature to the flashlight body.
1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.
Task 2. Create the first handle curve.
1. Click Insert > Style .
2. Click and select the FRONT datum from the model tree.
3. Click > Front .
4. Click > New > Planar and create a curve with four points as
Figure 21: First Handle Curve
5. Click [Display curvature plots]

NOTES
6. Click Edit and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the
one shown in the following figure.
Figure 22: Editing Curve
Task 3. Create the second handle curve.
1. Click [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot.
2. Click N e w in the CURVE dialog box and create a curve with five
points as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23: Creating Second Curve

NOTES
3. Click [Display curvature plots]
4. Click Edit and drag the curve points to form a shape similar to the
one shown in the following figure.
Figure 24: Editing Second Curve
5. Click [Clear curvature plot] to turn off the curvature plot.
Task 4. Create third handle curve.
1. Click > New > Free and create the first cross section by
clicking <ALT> and snapping to the existing curves as shown in

NOTES
Figure 25: Creating a Free Curve
2. Click Add > Midpoint and select a location as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 26: Selecting a Midpoint Location
3. Click Edit and use the <SHIFT> key to pull the point perpendicular
from the FRONT plane. Shape the curve as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 27: Shaping Curve

NOTES
Task 5. Using the same techniques, create another new curve and shape
Figure 28: Creating and Shaping a Second Curve
1. Click OK to close the CURVE dialog box.
2. Click , select the four curves that form the handle, and click
OK .
3. Click .
4. Click to shade the model.
Figure 29: Creating Surface from Four Style Curves
5. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge .
6. Select the handle surface and then the body surface.
7. Toggle the mesh for the Quilt Sides as shown in the following
figure.

NOTES
Figure 30: Quilting Sides
8. Click .
9. Click Feature > Mirror Geom and select the FRONT plane.
Figure 31: Mirroring Geometry
10. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge , select the left and
right halves of the flashlight body, and click .
11. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt, and select the
surface quilt.
12. Flip the Material Side arrow to add material to the INSIDE of the
surface.
13. Enter a thickness value of [2 . 0] and click . (You may wish to

add the Style curves to a layer and blank the layer)

NOTES
Figure 32: Finished Model
14. Save and click File > Close Window .
15. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Click OK

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• ISDX integrates freeform surfacing and parametric modeling to

enhance existing surfacing capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER, enabling
you to create product forms that require flexible surfaces.
• Style allows you to create geometry using a single-view layout or 4-
view layout.
• While creating a Style feature, a new menu named Styling is added
and many new commands are available.
• A curve can be created as a free 3-D curve or as a planar curve.
• To create a Style surface you need four touching boundary curves.
• To change the shape of a surface, you need to manipulate the shape of
the boundary curves.

18
The Resolve Environment
Pro/ENGINEER provides the Resolve Environment to help you fix
regeneration failures.
By learning how to use the Resolve Environment, you will be able to
refine existing features and parameters. This is preferable and more
efficient than recreating them.
Objectives
• Describe several regeneration failure types.

• Start the Resolve Environment.
• Diagnose feature regeneration problems.
• Run the “quick fix” to resolve failed regenerations.
• Describe some of the ways to change your model designs to
resolve feature regeneration failures.
Page 18-1
NOTES
REGENERATION FAILURES
Failures usually occur because a feature gets changed and the effected
change conflicts with other features. These types of failures occur due to
the following reasons:
• You create new features that are unattached and have one-sided edges.
• You resume a feature that now conflicts with another (such as having
an edge round and a chamfer on the same edge).
• The feature intersection is no longer valid because dimensional
changes have moved the intersecting surfaces.
• An assembly you retrieve cannot open the required models that are
included in the assembly.
• The assembly constraints for a component are invalid.
• You have violated a relation constraint.
Starting the Resolve Environment

As soon as a regeneration failure occurs, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
starts the Resolve Environment. When this happens:
• The F i l e pull-down menu is grayed out (unavailable) so you cannot

save the model.
• The failed feature and all subsequent features remain un-regenerated.
• The current model displays only the features that have regenerated up
to the point of failure.
• Pro/ENGINEER displays an explanation of the problem in the
Message Area.
• Pro/ENGINEER displays the RESOLVE menu options in the MENU
MANAGER and a diagnostics window.
Resolving Regeneration Failures

Once you have entered the Resolve Environment, you can address the
failure problem using any of the following methods:
• Undo all of the changes that you have made since the last successful
regeneration.
• Diagnose the cause of the model failure using the current (failed)
model or the backup model.

NOTES
• Attempt a quick fix of the problem using shortcuts for performing

standard operations on the failed feature only.
• Change the failed model or a backup model using standard part or
assembly functionality.
Specifying a Model
When you diagnose the problem or change the model, you can work on
the current failed model or a backup model. If you use a backup model,
Pro/ENGINEER shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, so that
you can modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed
in the current model.
If you select the Regen Backup option from the ENVIRONMENT dialog
box, the system saves a copy of the current model to disk with the name
REGEN_BACKUP_MODEL####.PRT prior to each regeneration, and
removes the file when you exit the Resolve Environment. Otherwise, it
uses the last version of the current model saved on disk prior to the failure.
Undoing Changes
Rather than attempt to resolve the problem, you can simply undo the step
that brought you into the Resolve Environment. However, this may not be
the best choice in some cases. For example, if the feature fails because of
the change that you have made, even if you undo the change, the model
itself still remains problematic. The Undo approach is most appropriate in
those cases in which you either did not intend to make the change or you
want to fix the problem in the model without using the Resolve
Environment tools.
Note:
Keep in mind that the Resolve Environment tools are designed
to resolve failures in order to allow you to build more robust
models.
Diagnosing the Problem

When you use the Resolve Environment, it is always good practice to
interrogate the model to determine what has caused the model failure. The
system gives you many diagnostic tools to perform an investigation. To
interrogate the model, you can use the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window
to display the following information:

The Resolve Environment P a g e 1 8- 3
NOTES
• A description of the current model and backup models.

• Information concerning the failed feature.
• Hints on resolving the problem.
Figure 1: FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS Window
If you need to investigate the problem further, you can use the Investigate
option to obtain the following information about the current model or the
backup model, if it exists:
• Modified dimensions.
• All modifications and changes.
• All references for the failed feature in the model.
• Invalid geometry of the failed feature.
You can then choose to roll the model back to one of the following: the
failed feature (for the backup model only), the feature just before the
failed feature, the state at the end of the last successful feature
regeneration, or a specified feature.
Performing a Quick Fix on the Failed Feature

Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can perform the following operations on
the failed feature only:
• Redefine it.
• Reroute it.
• Suppress the failed feature along with its children.
• Delete it with its children.

NOTES
Note:
When you make changes in the Resolve Environment, they can
affect the failed feature or another specified feature. If you
suppress features using the QUICK FIX menu, you should
investigate the cause of the failure before continuing with the
part design. If you do not make any corrections, you may not
be able to resume the feature later in the design.
Changing the Model

Using the FIX MODEL menu, you can change any feature or component
to solve the regeneration problem. As you change a model in the Resolve
Environment, however, consider any parent/child relationships that exist
between features and components to avoid changing the intent of the
model itself. Specifically, you can use any of the following approaches:
• Use the FEAT menu to perform feature operations on the model.

• Modify dimensions using the standard MODIFY menu.
• Regenerate the model again.
• Restore dimensions, parameters, relations, or all of these to their
values prior to the failure.
• Add, delete, or modify relations, as necessary, to regenerate the model.
• Display the PART SETUP menu to perform additional part set up
procedures.

NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is resolve regeneration failures by using the resolve
environment.
Method
In this exercise, you add features to a part, which causes other features to
fail. You then investigate and resolve the problem in the Resolve
Environment.
EXERCISE 1: Resolving a Regeneration Failure
Task 1. Use the Feature List and Model Player options to determine
how the chamfer part was built.

intro_proe_320 \ 18_resolve.
3. Retrieve CHAMFERS.PRT.
4. Open the feature list. Click Info > Feature List . Review the
Information Window and close it.
5. Regenerate the model in steps. Click Utilities > Model Player.
6. First click to rewind the model player to begin at the first

feature.
7. Click to regenerate feature by feature.
Note:
The system regenerates the two chamfers after the two
protrusions. You will not see datum planes if you have them
off.

NOTES
Task 2. Insert an edge round on the bottom edge of the model. Add the
rounds after the second (triangular) protrusion.
1. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Activate from the MENU
MANAGER.
2. Insert after the second protrusion. Select the second protrusion

feature of the model. Note that the system no longer displays the
chamfers, as shown in the following figure.
Round these
four edges.
Insert after this

protrusion
Figure 2: The Resolve Model
3. Click Insert > Round .
4. Leave Simple as the default. Then click Done from the ROUND
TYPE menu.
5. Leave Constant and Edge Chain the defaults; and click Done
from the RND SET ATTR menu.
6. Click Surf Chain from the CHAIN menu.
7. Query Sel the hidden bottom surface and click Accept .
8. Select all the highlighted edges to round. Click Select All from the
CHAIN OPT menu; then click Done from the CHAIN menu.
9. Enter a radius value. Type [2.0] followed by <ENTER>.
10. Complete the round feature. Click O K .
11. Click Feature List from the INFO pull-down menu.

NOTES
Note:
The system created the round feature after the second
protrusion. Also, note the regeneration status of the two
chamfers.
12. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.
13. Click Feature > Insert Mode > Cancel to exit insert mode. When
the system asks you if you want to resume the features that it
suppressed when activating insert mode, type [yes].
Task 3. Pro/ENGINEER places you in the Resolve Environment

because it cannot regenerate the chamfer feature. The references for the
chamfer feature no longer exist because the system replaced them with the
round feature that you created in insert mode. Diagnose the model’s
problem.
1. Review all of the information provided in the FAILURE

DIAGNOSTICS window.
2. Click Overview and review the Resolve Feature Overview. Close

the window.
3. Click Feature Info and review the Failed Feature Info. Close the
window.
4. Click Resolve Hints and review Pro/ENGINEER’s suggestions

for resolving the problem. Close the window.
5. Click Investigate from the RESOLVE FEAT menu. Accept the

default Current Modl , and click Show Ref from the
INVESTIGATE menu.
6. Navigate through the window of the missing chamfer by clicking

on each item and showing references. When you have finished
showing the missing references, click Close .
Note:
The edge references for the chamfer appear on the screen, but
they are no longer part of the model. The round feature that
you created removed these edges. Because it regenerated prior
to the chamfer, it regenerated successfully and the chamfer
failed.

NOTES
Task 4. Resolve the failed feature by removing the failed chamfer

feature from the part model. Recall that the quick fix option for resolve
only works on the failed feature.
1. Click Quick Fix from the RESOLVE FEAT menu; then click
Delete from the QUICK FIX menu. Read the prompt. Click Delete
All > Yes from the YES/NO menu to exit the Resolve Environment.
2. Again review the feature list. Click Info > Feature List . Note that
the chamfer feature is no longer part of the model.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• It is not uncommon for models to fail due to problems in design.

• Pro/ENGINEER provides a Resolve Environment to rectify failed
features.
• Failures usually occur due to design changes in certain parts after an
extensive model has been built up.
• The Failure Diagnostics window in the Resolve Environment displays
accurate and specific information regarding particular failures.
• Rerouting, redefining, suppressing, and deleting a feature along with
its children are some of the quick fixes that can be performed on a
failed feature.
• A failed model can more permanently fixed by using the FIX MODEL
menu.

19
Information Tools
In this module you learn how to obtain many kinds of information
from your models and assemblies. You will learn how to query your
designs to obtain regeneration information, clearance and
interference characteristics, and more.
Objectives
• Obtain information about features, parts, and assemblies.

• Obtain regeneration information.
• Calculate mass properties.
• Calculate clearance and interference between parts.
Page 19-1
NOTES
MODEL INFORMATION
It is good design practice to determine the way a model was built before
making any modifications and additions. For this, Pro/ENGINEER
provides useful tools to extract information about individual features,
regeneration, assembly components, and entire models.
Obtaining Information about a Specific Feature

Using the Info Feature option, you can obtain information about a
particular feature in PART, ASSEMBLY, and DRAWING modes.
Obtaining Regeneration Information

Using Utilities > Model Player, you can step successively through the
regeneration of the part—starting from a specified feature or from the
beginning—in the current order of creation.
Figure 1: The Model Player Dialog Box
The model player option is particularly useful because it allows you to

observe the design of a part, and assists you in determining if poor design
practices were used to create it.
Accessing Information about Part Features

Using the Model option, you can access information about every feature
on a part. The system lists regenerated and suppressed features, all

NOTES
coordinate systems, cross-sections, and reference dimensions in an

INFORMATION WINDOW.
Using Feature List , you can list all features in the model in their
regeneration order and obtain the feature number, feature ID, name, type,
suppression order, and regeneration status for each.
Obtaining Information about Assemblies

Using the Component option in ASSEMBLY mode, you can obtain
information about how a component was assembled, how its parent/child
relationships and parameters were formed.
You can also use the Model option to access information about selected
assembly components. In the INFORMATION WINDOW, the system
displays the names of the components in a hierarchical structure to show
how they were assembled.
Tips & Techniques:

The system lists only the names of the objects in the
Information Window. However, if you set the configuration
file option DISPLAY_FULL_OBJECT_PATH to yes, it
displays the full pathnames of the objects, along with their
object-types and version-number suffixes.
MEASUREMENT, INTERFERENCE, AND MASS

PROPERTIES
With Pro/ENGINEER’s ANALYSIS pull-down menu you can:
• Add engineering information to a model.

• Analyze the model through measurement.
• Check interference.
• Calculate mass properties.
Calculating Mass Properties

Using the Model Analysis option, you can compute mass properties for
parts, assemblies, and cross-sections.

Information Tools P a g e 1 9- 3
NOTES
In a mass properties calculation, the system does not include the mass of
suppressed features or suppressed components in any assembly.
Note
By default, mass properties do not automatically update when
you make changes to the model. You must recalculate the
mass properties to Using the Model Analysis option, you
can:
• Calculate volume or interference between pairs of any combination of

subassemblies, parts, surfaces, cables, and entities.
• Perform a global clearance check to find all pairs of parts or
subassemblies with clearances less than a specified clearance distance.
• Perform a global interference check to find all interfering pairs of parts
or subassemblies.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to extract information to determine how a
part was created.
Method
In Exercise 1, you learn to use information tools to calculate measurements.
EXERCISE 1: Using Information Tools
Task 1. Interrogate the regeneration cycle of a gear part .

intro_proe_320 \ 19_info_tools.
3. Open GEAR_COUNTERWEIGHT.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Model Player.
5. Click to rewind the model player.
6. Click to step through the model.
7. Click Show Dims.
8. Click Feat Info to obtain information about the feature to see how
it was created.
9. Click Close in INFORMATION WINDOW.
10. Click to continue to step through the regeneration of the part,

feature by feature.
11. Complete the regeneration and close the MODEL PLAYER dialog
box.
12. Click Info > Model .

NOTES
13. Scroll through the feature list in the INFORMATION WINDOW

dialog box, then close.
Task 2. Determine mass properties for the model.
1. Click Analysis > Model Analysis.
2. Click Compute , accepting all the default options in the MODEL

ANALYSIS dialog box.
3. Click Info in the MODEL ANALYSIS dialog box. Information on

the mass properties gets displayed.
4. Scroll down the INFORMATION WINDOW and close it when you

are done.
5. Close the MASS PROPERTIES dialog box.
Task 3. Measure the model.
1. Click Analysis > Measure
2. In the MEASURE dialog box, click Area from the TYPE drop-down
list.
3. Select the front cylindrical surface.
select this edge

to measure the
length.
First select this

surface to calculate
the surface area.
Figure 2: Measuring Surface Area and Curve Length

NOTES
Task 4. Measure the length of the gear edge feature.
1. Click Curve Length in the TYPE drop-down list.
2. Select the gear edge as shown in the preceding figure.
3. The length of the edge appears in the message area of your screen
and also in the RESULTS area of the dialog box.
Task 5. Measure the distance between two vertices:
1. Click Distance from the TYPE drop-down list.
2. Click Vertex from the FROM drop-down list.
3. Select the vertex as shown in the following figure.
4. Select Vertex from the TO drop-down list
5. Select the second vertex as shown.
6. The system measures the distance between vertices and displays it

in the message area and in the RESULTS area of the dialog box.
7. Click Close .
Select this
vertex first.
Select this
vertex second
Figure 3: Measuring Distance
8. Save the model.

NOTES

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• With Pro/ENGINEER you not only provide information to the system

while building models but you can also retrieve information for
analysis or manufacturing purposes.
• In any model you can obtain information about any specific feature.
• You can access information about any specific part to learn how it was
built feature by feature using the Regen Info option
• You can calculate mass properties for parts, assemblies, and sections
using the Model Analysis option.
• In a part you can measure, among other things, distances between

vertices, length of curve edge, and surface areas.
• You can calculate interference between pairs of any combination of

subassemblies, parts, surfaces, cables, and entities to reduce the
amount of calculation time needed to perform a global interference
check among all components.

20
Configuring Pro/ENGINEER
In this module you learn how to modify your Pro/ENGINEER
working environment. You learn how to configure Pro/ENGINEER
either to create a company-wide standard or to suit your own
individual needs.
Objectives
• Locate network-based Pro/ENGINEER configuration files.

• Create customized Pro/ENGINEER work sessions.
• Automate processes with map keys.
• Configure your toolbar and model tree
Page 20-1
NOTES
CUSTOMIZING PRO/ENGINEER
You use configuration files to customize your Pro/ENGINEER work
environment. These files can include your preferences for tolerance,
display formats, calculation accuracy, the number of digits used in
Sketcher, and so on. The default name for the Pro/ENGINEER
configuration file is CONFIG.PRO.
You can edit configuration files to set company standards in several areas,
including:
• Storing drawing formats.

• Submitting project objects.
• Setting default measurement units for new parts (such as millimeters
instead of inches).
• Setting library file locations.
Defining Configuration Files

Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several areas, as shown
in the following figure. However, if a particular option is present in more
than one configuration file, uses the last value read will be used.
When starting, Pro/ENGINEER first reads a protected configuration file

called CONFIG.SUP (the “.sup” extension stands for “Supervisor’s
configuration file”) from the directory <LOADPOINT>/TEXT (the
directory from which you install Pro/ENGINEER). These options override
the same options that may be set in other configuration files.
This file can be used to establish customized company standards for all of
your Pro/ENGINEER users. Every entry in the CONFIG.SUP file locks out
any duplicate entries in your local CONFIG.PRO configuration files.

P a g e 2 0- 2 Configuring Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Figure 1: Possible Locations of Configuration Files on a Network
Pro/ENGINEER reads in configuration files from the following directories

in this order:
• The CONFIG.PRO file in the LOADPOINT directory.

• The CONFIG.PRO file in your home directory.
• The CONFIG.PRO file in your start-up directory.
• Default values built into the software.
Note
For a complete listing of configuration file options and
defaults, refer to the Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER User’s
Guide.
Editing Configuration Files

You can edit configuration files during your working session. Do this by
using the Options option in the UTILITIES menu.
The following figure shows the OPTIONS dialog box.

Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Preferences Dialog Box
Note
Configuration files are not automatically loaded after editing.
They have to be loaded by clicking the Apply button.
CreatingMapkeys
A Mapkey is a keyboard macro that you can create using the Mapkeys
option in the UTILITIES pull-down menu. It performs a series of selections
when you type only one or two keystrokes.
The MAPKEYS dialog box lists each mapkey that is in session and
provides a description of its function. The RECORD MAPKEY dialog box
allows you to create, modify, run, delete, and save mapkeys to a
configuration file. Both are displayed in the following figures.

NOTES
Figure 3: Mapkeys and Record Mapkey Dialog Boxes
CUSTOMIZING YOUR TOOLBAR

Adding Icons to Existing Toolbars
All pull-down menu options can be associated with easy-to-use toolbar
icons. To do this, you can create new icons and add them to existing
toolbars
The CUSTOMIZE dialog box includes a list of existing pull-down menu

options on the left with corresponding icons on the right. This is illustrated
As you go down the menu options on the left, you can simply drag the
associated icon of your choice onto the toolbar.

NOTES
Figure 4: Setting Toolbar Icons
Saving the Settings

You save your changes to toolbars by using the Automatically Save To
option in the CUSTOMIZE dialog box. This option creates a file called
CONFIG.WIN in the same directory that the file resides in.
This file automatically loads when Pro/ENGINEER is started the next

time.
Creating Pull-down Menus

You can create a separate pull-down menu for newly defined Mapkeys.
This allows the use of the mouse to select your mapkey definitions. Quick
keys, such as F1 , are also valid for the mapkey.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

Name keystrokes so that you can easily remember what they
refer to. An example is sd for Cosmetic Shade."
Associating New Icons for Mapkeys

Mapkeys have a default icon associated with them but you have the option
to change the icon. With the CUSTOMIZE dialog box open, you can
modify the displayed icon. The modifying options include the ability to:
• Delete the icon.

• Copy the icon image.
• Paste a copied icon image.
• Edit the icon image with an icon editor.
• Choose a button image from a predefined list.
• Show the text associated to the icon.
THE MODEL TREE

The MODEL TREE is a powerful tool to organize and manipulate active
objects.
Most importantly, the MODEL TREE is an information tool as well as an

interactive operations tool, complete with a configurable interface and
search engine.

NOTES
Figure 5: MODEL TREE Display
In addition to using the MODEL TREE tool to display features, you can
also configure it to maintain predefined and customized columns that
correspond to items in the tree.
Some commonly used columns are:
• Info – provides information regarding:

Status (regenerated, unregenerated, failed, frozen, or
suppressed)
Feature number
Feature ID (as shown in the preceding figure.)
Feature type
Feature name
• Layers – Provides the status of layers.
• Model Params – Displays new model parameters affecting the entire

model.
• Feat Params – Displays new parameters affecting a feature.

NOTES
Figure 6: MODEL TREE COLUMNS Dialog Box
The MODEL TREE COLUMNS dialog box is available with the VIEW
menu Model Tree Setup option.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you learn to configure the default Pro/ENGINEER
interface to suit your working environment.
Method
In Exercise 1, you develop a configuration file and a toolbar to customize
the Pro/ENGINEER working environment.
In Exercise 2, you create a mapkey to help increase efficiency.
Tools
Icons Description
Save as
Mapkey icon you create

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up a Configuration File

Task 1. Create a new configuration file in the local directory and edit it.

intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe.
3. Open BUSHING.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Options.
Figure 7: Editing the Configuration File
Task 2. Alter default values to tailor the working environment to suit

your preferences.
1. In the SHOWING dropdown menu, select Current Session .
2. Clear the Show only options loaded from file check box.
3. In the SORT drop-down box, select By Category . Now, set it back

to Alphabetical .
4. Scroll down the list and select spin_center_display.

Configuring Pro/ENGINEER P a g e 2 0- 1 1
NOTES
5. The default Value is YES , which means the spin center will always
be displayed when Pro/ENGINEER is launched.
6. In the VALUE drop-down list, select No , then click Add/Change .
Figure 8: Selecting a Configuration File Option.
7. Check the Show only options loaded from file box. Only the
options you have changed from the default settings will be listed.
8. In the OPTION box, type [spin_with_part_entities], then

press <ENTER>.
9. In the VALUE drop-down list, select YES and click Add/Change .

This option is added to the list of changed settings for this session
of Pro/ENGINEER.

NOTES
Figure 9: Second Option Added
Task 3. Add additional options using a Keyword Search. Look for an

option that will prompt you to save any "unsaved" data when you exit
Pro/ENGINEER.
1. In the OPTIONS dialog box, click Find .
2. In the TYPE KEYWORD box, type [exit].
3. Click Find Now . One option is found. Read the description and
select it.
4. Set the default value to YES in the SET VALUE dialog box. Click
Add/Change .
Task 4. Add an option that includes more lines to the message area of
Pro/ENGINEER.
1. In the TYPE KEYWORD box, type [message].
2. Click Find Now .

NOTES
3. Select visible_message_lines.
4. Select visible_message_lines in the CHOOSE OPTIONS dialog

box. Type [5] in the SET VALUE box.
5. Click Add/Change > Close .
6. Click Apply in the OPTIONS dialog box.
Task 5. Save the changes to the settings such that they are effective
every time Pro/ENGINEER is launched.
1. Click .
2. Leave the default [config.pro] as the name.
3. Click OK > Close .
4. Click File > Exit to save the file and exit the editor.

NOTES
Task 6. Verify that the changed settings are currently in effect. Some
settings will require a software restart to be active
1. Click File > Exit.
2. Start a new session of Pro/ENGINEER and open BUSHING.PRT.
3. Spin the part using the mouse. Notice that the datum planes remain
displayed during spinning. This is a result of the change to the
spin_with_part_entities option.
4. Modify a feature. Click Modify . Select the center hole of the

bushing. Select the 19.12 dimension, type [10.00].
5. Click Regenerate to update the geometry. Notice that the message

window has been expanded to list five lines.
6. Click File > Exit > Yes. Since you modified the bushing but did
not save it, you are presented with the option to save the model.
7. Press <ENTER> to save the part.
8. Restart Pro/ENGINEER.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Mapkey

Task 1. Create a mapkey that will rename a feature.

intro_proe_320 \ 20_config_proe.
3. Open CRANK.PRT.
4. Click Utilities > Mapkeys.
5. Click N e w in the MAPKEYS dialog box.
Task 2. Define a mapkey to develop .
1. Type [fn] as the KEY SEQUENCE.
2. Type [Feature Name] as the NAME.
3. Type [Name a feature for easy identification] for

DESCRIPTION .
4. Select Pause for keyboard input .
5. Click Record .
Task 3. Record the mapkey.
1. Click Setup > Name .
2. Select on the hole feature in the model.
3. Type [Shaft_bore] and press <ENTER>
4. Click Done .
5. Click Stop in the RECORD MAPKEYS dialog box.
6. Click OK .
7. Click Save leaving the default name CURRENT_SESSION.PRO.
8. Close the RECORD MAPKEY dialog box

NOTES
Task 4. Test your new mapkey.
1. Type [fn].
2. Select on the boss and type [boss] as the new name.
3. Click Info > Feature List . You will notice the new names you
have given to the model features.
Task 5. Learn to include an icon onto your toolbar.
1. Click Utilities > Customize Screen.
2. Select the third icon from the right; then click Description .
3. Read the description, then click <ENTER>.
4. Drag the icon next to the OPEN icon on the SAVE toolbar, as
shown below:
Figure 10 Inserting Erase Icon into the Standard Toolbar
Task 6. Customize your toolbar to include an icon for the [fn] mapkey
you created.
1. In the CUSTOMIZE dialog box, select Mapkeys in CATEGORIES

to highlight it.
2. In the MAPKEYS area of the dialog box, click the smile face .
3. Click Modify Selection > Choose Button Image .
4. In the SELECT MAPKEY ICON dialog box, click
5. Now drag it from the dialog box onto your toolbar.
Note
The system will automatically save the changes the
CONFIG.WIN file to your working directory. You can change
the directory that the file is saved to.

NOTES
Task 7. Finish the definition of the toolbars.
1. Notice the entry at the bottom of the dialog box. Leave the option
to automatically save the file and click OK .
2. A part of your customized toolbar could look like this:
Feature name mapkey icon
Figure 11:Customized Toolbar
3. Erase the current testing model from memory. Click the newly
added Erase Current icon from the toolbar, then click Yes.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• The Pro/ENGINEER environment is customizable.

• You should first load the CONFIG.PRO file in order to configure your
environment.
• You can create mapkeys, or macros, of frequently used series of steps
in the design process.
• New toolbars and toolbar icons can be created to associate with the
mapkeys you create.
• New pull-down menus can be created.
• The MODEL TREE can be used as an effective information tool with
many customizable columns.

21
Modeling Philosophy
Design intent is the concept that connects the various techniques for
creating parts, assemblies, and drawings. Capturing design intent by
various methods is the core of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling
philosophy.
Objectives
• Describe how to incorporate your design intent into new models.

• Describe the benefits of using parent/child relationships in your
designs.
• Describe how to use relations.
• Describe the importance of associativity in Pro/ENGINEER.
• Describe how to change design intent in your models.
Page 21-1
NOTES
DESIGN INTENT
Before you start designing parts and assemblies in Pro/ENGINEER, it is
important that you first define the intention of your design. At this
preliminary stage, the high-level design intent is usually already
understood. Before starting a new design in Pro/ENGINEER, you should
be able to answer following questions:
• What is the purpose of the product? How will it satisfy this purpose?
• What are the major subsystems necessary to satisfy this function?
• How will these individual subsystems be incorporated into the overall
product?
• What design changes are likely to occur as the product is being
developed?
• Is this a new design or is it based on an existing product?
• What are the relevant design constraints? (size, weight, cost, and so
on)
• How will this product interact with its environment?
Answers to many of these questions may already exist in the form of

product specifications, product quotes, and proposals. Also, any
conceptual design work that has already been completed should provide
information on how the product will look and how each of its subsystems
will interact with one another.
This information can be managed using Pro/INTRALINK and

Pro/ENGINEER. Existing documents that are not Pro/ENGINEER files
can be managed by Pro/INTRALINK. Dependencies between the non-
Pro/ENGINEER files and the assemblies and parts with which they are
associated can be created, so that this information is available to the
designer working on the detailed components.
In addition, conceptual design results and ideas can be captured in

Pro/NOTEBOOK. Pro/NOTEBOOK (also known as Layout Mode) is an
optional module within Pro/ENGINEER that provides tools to create two-
dimensional layouts. Two-dimensional sketches and pictures of an
assembly design can be documented with critical design dimensions, notes
and parameters. These parameters can be shared globally among all
components of the assembly and can be used to drive design parts,
assemblies and skeletons.

NOTES
Recording Your Design Criteria

Before you start creating a model, you should record the design criteria for
the model that would include:
• Order of features • Feature form

• Base feature • Feature type
• Feature • Depth
duplication
Using Pro/ENGINEER as a Parametric Tool

• One of the major facets of the parametric nature of Pro/ENGINEER is
the ability to generate parent/child relationships.
• You can also use Pro/ENGINEER to interrelate feature dimensions by
creating relations without creating parent/child relationships.
Creating Parent/Child Relationships

Methods
The following are some of the ways in which you can create parent/child
relationships among features:
• Specifying the sketching/placement plane.

• Orienting the reference plane.
• Dimensioning and specifying Sketcher references and constraints.
• Defining feature depth /depth references.
• Edge references (Rounds/Chamfers)
• Component Assembly constraints.
Using Relations
Relations allow you to create a relationship between features or
components in an assembly without creating a parent/child relationship in
which child features control their parents.
Note
You can document the modeling intent by commenting the
relation and changing the symbolic name.

Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1- 3
NOTES
Optimizing Designs with Relations
If you have developed good parent/child relationships along with a well-

defined parametric behavior of the model, relations can elevate as well as
optimize certain design criteria.
Optimizing Designs with Behavioral Modeler
With Behavioral Modeler you have the ability to perform an iterative

analysis of your design by developing a Design Study. A multitude of
objectives can be met this way. You can:
• Determine the dependency between a design specification and a model

parameter or dimension using a Sensitivity Analysis.
• Find a set of values of specified model parameters that satisfy a set of
design specific criteria using a Feasibility study.
• Find a set of values of specified parameters that optimize the design
based on some criteria while satisfying a set of design specifications
using an Optimization study.
Advantages of Pro/ENGINEER Associativity

Creating Assemblies
Associativity among drawings, parts, features leads to easy regeneration
while reducing the effort needed in designing complex machines.
Creating Skeleton Parts

You can also create parts at the assembly level, referred to as skeletons, to
capture the intent of the interrelationship between components in an
assembly. You can also use these parts to define motion in an assembly.

NOTES
Figure 1: Skeleton Example
Using Engineering Notebooks

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to generate a centralized location to capture,
document, and control the design intent of a product model. Layouts and
parametric relations can be stored and retrieved as necessary
Changing Design Intent

• Redefine – Changes any of the originally defined elements in features
or defined constraints in an assembly.
• Reroute – Changes the external references that features and
components have in a model.
• Insert Mode – Changes the regeneration cycle by allowing you to
insert features or components into the regeneration cycle.
• Reorder – Changes the order of the regeneration of existing features
in a part or components in the assembly.
• Interchange Mode – Changes the design intent of an assembly by
swapping one functionally equivalent model with another.

NOTES
Goal
The goal of this lab is to review in a classroom question-answer format
the main points about capturing design intent with Pro/ENGINEER.
Methods
In Part 1, capturing Part Level Design Intent is discussed.
In Part 2, capturing Assembly Level Design Intent is discussed.
Part I: Part Level Design Intent

In the following part model the goal is to build the model as efficiently as
possible, while maintaining Design Intent. Since the only source of design
intent available is the drawing on the following page, it must be strictly
followed. The entire model must be built using only those dimensions
shown: no more, no less. For example if a particular feature uses a certain
dimension, no other feature may use the same dimension.
Figure 2: Building a Model with Specific Design Intent

NOTES
Decision Process Questionnaire
1. What should the base feature be?

ANS:
2. What feature types are possible for the base feature?

ANS:
3. Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent?
ANS:
4. What type of feature(s) can create next feature?

ANS:
5. Which of the possible feature types will best fit out Design Intent?
ANS:
6. What order should the features be created in?

ANS:
7. How should the small hole be created twice?

ANS:

NOTES
8. When should the rounds be created?

ANS:

NOTES
Figure 3: Drawing of Part Model

NOTES
Part II: Assembly level Design Intent

For the next discussion, consider the following views and drawing of the
VALVE assembly. Overall, determine courses of action to create the
assembly. The part models may or may not have already been created in
Pro/ENGINEER.
Figure 4: Assembling Parts
Decision Process Questionnaire

1. What technique could be used to help relate the components
together for assembly and motion analysis purposes?
ANS:

NOTES
2. What types of features could exist in a skeleton?

What might it look like?
ANS:
3. Which component should be assembled first? Second? How is

this affected when using a skeleton?
ANS:
4. What implications could arise from deleting the center shaft?

Suppressing? Blanking on a Layer? Replacing? How could some
of these issues be handled?
ANS:
5. How should the assembly be structured with subassemblies?

ANS:
6. We wish to be able to change the angular constraint on the center

shaft from 0° to 90°. How does this affect our decisions?
ANS:
7. What effect would changing the center shaft diameter have on the
other components?
ANS:

Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1- 1 1
NOTES
8. How would interactions with other components affect the process?

ANS:
Figure 5: Assembly Drawing

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Pro/ENGINEER's modeling philosophy is driven by considerations of

effectively capturing design intent.
• Pro/ENGINEER's feature-based, parametric, and associative nature
has many advantages in achieving the desired intent.
• The capacity to introduce parametric relations while creating models is
a special feature of the software that furthers the cause of design intent
capture.
• Parent/Child Relationships in Assemblies and methods of specifying
and altering them enables changes in intent.
• Information tool, drawings, engineering notebooks, the behavioral
modeler, the ability to customize Pro/ENGINEER environment, the
Resolve Environment to solve regeneration problems—all in their own
respective ways help in the overarching goal of capturing design intent
and thus are essential components of Pro/ENGINEER's modeling
philosophy.

Modeling Philosophy P a g e 2 1- 1 3
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Appendix
A
Review Questions
This module contains review questions intended for an interactive
daily discussion in class. It is divided into five sections corresponding
to the five days of instructor-led training.
Objectives
• Review the important concepts and principles that are covered

during each training day.
• Participate in discussion of related topics.
P a g e A-1
NOTES
DAY 1: REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is design intent?
2. List three pick and place features.
3. List two types of sketched features.
4. What are the advantages of a solid model?
5. List three types of holes. What are the placement options for each?

P a g e A- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
6. How does the sketching plane capture design intent? The

Reference Plane?
7. List two ways to create an edge chain round.
8. What is the difference between a hole and a cut?
9. Must the reference plane always be perpendicular to the sketching

plane?
10. What is the Pro/ENGINEER convention for orienting the view of

the sketching plane when creating a feature that adds material?
Removes material?

Review Questions P a g e A- 3
NOTES
11. What does feature-based modeling mean?
12. What does parametric mean?
13. List two functions that References provide in Sketcher.
14. What is the most important thing to ‘build’ into your sketch before
exiting Sketcher?
15. What is the difference between the options for ONE SIDE
compared to BOTH SIDES for a protrusion or cut?
16. List the nine Sketcher constraint options. Which of these options
are multi-purpose?

NOTES
17. Can you over-dimension or under-dimension a section in Intent

Manager?
18. With what features can Dynamic Modify be used? How is it

activated?
19. Why does Intent Manager create “weak” dimensions? How can
you remove them?
20. What is the easiest procedure for deleting or redefining features?

NOTES

1. What is a model template? What does it contain?
2. When should you use a start template? Can it be customized?
3. What is the importance of the first solid ‘base’ feature?
4. Do the sketching plane and reference plane always become parents

to a sketched feature?
5. When orienting the sketching plane using a horizontal reference, if

you click Top from the menu and select Datum TOP , which side of
Datum TOP will face the top of the computer screen?

NOTES
6. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER, and why is

it so important?
7. Do Sketcher references establish parent/child relationships?

List six ways a Sketcher reference can be established.
8. Why would you want to set up a parameter in Pro/ENGINEER?
9. What is required in the sketch of a revolved feature? What is the

case with more that one of this entity type?
10. What are the two sections required for a swept feature?
11. How would you create a 3-Dimensional (3-D) sweep?

NOTES
12. What is the minimum number of sections required for a blended

feature?
13. What are the requirements for each section of a blend?
14. Is it possible to create a swept or blended cut?
15. For what purpose do you use relations? Give an example.
16. How do you know if your relation is working correctly?
17. What are the three types of blends? What are the two options for
each?

NOTES

NOTES

1. What is a Datum Analysis feature and how is it used? List three
types.
2. What does BMX stand for?
3. Sensitivity and Optimization/ Feasibility studies are major

components of Behavioral Modeler. Briefly define each.
4. What is the difference between an Analysis and an Analysis

Feature? An Optimization and an Optimization Feature?
5. What is a drawing template? List at least three functions that a

template can be setup to perform.

P a g e A- 1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
6. How can you make multiple instances of a single feature? A single

instance of multiple features?
7. Why is it important to use default datum planes when orienting a

general view in a drawing?
8. What is unique about a general view?
9. What is the difference between a Projection view and an Auxiliary

view? A Detail view and a Partial View?
10. How can you create a rotational dimension in a sketched feature

that you are going to pattern?
11. How do you include a dimension and/or parameter in a drawing

note?

Review Questions P a g e A- 1 1
NOTES
12. How should you start every assembly?
13. What is the importance of the base component in an assembly?
14. Are parent/child relationships relevant in Assembly mode?
15. A drawing is created from bracket.prt, and modifications are then

made to the bracket. The drawing views will then have to re-
projected. True or False? What about the assembly using the
bracket? What is this ability called?
16. How can you change a component’s placement references without

having to delete the component and reassemble it? How can this
be accomplished with no menu interaction?

NOTES
17. What does <CTRL> <ALT> and the three mouse buttons do when
assembling a component?
18. List five of the constraint types for assembling a component.
19. What is the importance of subassemblies, and how can you create
them in Pro/ENGINEER?
20. What are the differences among Mod Dim, Mod Assem, Mod
Subasm, and Mod Part?
21. List the various options for Copying features.
22. List and compare the three Pattern types. How many directions are
available for each?

NOTES

1. For what purpose can you use layers in Part mode?
Assembly mode? Drawing mode?
2. What are three reasons why you might want to suppress a

Pro/ENGINEER feature?
3. Layers do not affect parent/child relationships, while Suppression

does. True or False?
4. List four types of additional datum features.
5. What are some uses for datum curves?
6. Describe the major concepts of Top Down Design

NOTES
7. What are six steps or phases of Top Down Design?
8. What is a skeleton and how can it be used?
9. Can a skeleton be used for part design as well as assembly design?

If so, How?
10. What is a surface? What types of models benefit from surfacing?
11. What does ISDX stand for?

NOTES
12. Is ISDX the only way to create surfaces in Pro/ENGINEER?
13. What can be accomplished with the STYLE feature?
14. How many features (curves, surfaces) can be contained in a style

feature?
15. What is required to generate a surface using ISDX?

NOTES

1. What is a parent/child relationship in Pro/ENGINEER?
2. List seven ways to establish a parent/child relationship in

Pro/ENGINEER.
3. What is design intent?
4. What does associativity mean?
5. What is a configuration file in Pro/ENGINEER, and why should

you use these files?
6. What is a mapkey?
7. When does Pro/ENGINEER activate the Resolve Environment?

NOTES
8. Will Pro/ENGINEER allow you to save a model that has a failed

feature?
9. What is the difference between the Quick Fix and Fix Model
options in the RESOLVE menu?
10. Why should you generally try to fix failed features instead of using
the Undo Changes option in the Resolve Environment?
11. What is the difference between Redefine and Reorder?
12. What are some advantages of feature-based modeling?

NOTES
13. Name four ways to capture design intent in a part model.
14. Name three ways to capture design intent in an assembly.
15. What options are avialable under Analysis> Measure ? In

Analysis > Model Analysis?
16. What is the model player and how can it be used?
17. What is your next step in the process of attaining mastery with
Pro/ENGINEER?

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Appendix
B
Project Laboratory
This module contains an advanced self-paced project that you can
work on after finishing the standard module exercises. The purpose
of this project is to provide you with an opportunity to practice the
skills you learned in the class without relying on step-by-step
instructions.
Objectives
• Apply the skills you learned in the course to real-world design

projects.
Page B-1
NOTES
INTRODUCTION
Throughout the next few days you will design several assembly
components. It is suggested that you use the project components that you
create during this course as part of this project lab. However, you may
choose to skip portions of the project and instead use the supplied models
to complete sections of the project laboratories.
As shown in the next figure, you will create a motor part, lower housing
part, snap ring part, and upper housing part. These components will be
used to build a blower and motor assembly.
Throughout the project, you will be working in the directory named

project. All measurement units are in metric.
Snap rings
Motor
housing
Cover
Motor shaft
Upper
housing
Lower
housing
Blower
Figure 1: Exploded View of Completed Project

P a g e B-2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
PART CREATION
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Part
To follow the design intent of the motor part, you must build it using only
those dimensions shown in the following figure. You create the part using
extruded sketched features, along with holes. In addition, you also use
relations to constrain the electronics support foundation (rectangular
shaped protrusion) a constant distance from the back surface of the base
feature.
Figure 2: Dimensions for Motor Part
1. Create a part named motor.prt.
2. Create the first solid feature. You may want to extrude a 70.00-
diameter circle to a blind depth of 90.00.
3. Add a feature to represent the electronics support foundation. This

foundation must be rectangular, measuring 82.5 X 60.0, as shown
in the following figure (with the height measuring 60.00 from the
center of the motor).

Appendix B P a g e B-3
NOTES
Figure 3: Electronics Support Foundation
4. To follow the design intent, place the electronics support

foundation a distance of 7.5 away from the surface of the
cylindrical base feature. Write a relation to cause the size of the
electronics support (base feature) to change when the base feature
depth changes. Regenerate the part and test the relation by
modifying the depth dimension of the base feature. Remember to
change the dimension back to the original depth value of 90.
5. Add the 100.0-diameter front protrusion feature to the model. You

will use that for a bolt flange.
6. Add a cut feature to the model so that you can remove material to
receive an armature. Assign it a 60.00-diameter and leave a 5.0-
wall thickness at the back of the motor, as shown in Section A-A.
Tips & Techniques:

You should pay careful attention to your selection or creation
of a datum plane for the section, as well as what type of feature
you create. The 5.0 wall thickness is the key to these
selections.
7. Add a 15.0-diameter hole feature to the back of the motor to use

for the motor shaft.
8. Save the model and clear the window by erasing the part.

NOTES
SECTION 2: Creating the Lower Housing Part

According to the design intent of the lower housing part, the revolved cut
must remain a specific distance from the side surfaces of the base feature
so that the model maintains a specific wall thickness. In addition, if the
diameter dimensions of the base support changes, the support feature and
flange feature should change as well.
Figure 4: Lower Housing Part
1. Create a part named lower_housing.prt.
2. Create the first solid feature. You may want to extrude a 120-
diameter semicircle to a blind depth of 80.
3. Create a flange to bolt this part to another component in an

assembly. As shown in the following figure, give the flange feature
dimensions of 15 x 4.1 (Hint: Using the power of feature-based
modeling, create the feature with an open section.)

NOTES
Figure 5: Lower Housing Flange
4. Add the base support feature to the model. Sketch the feature on
the central datum plane and extrude the feature in both directions,
as shown in the two following figures.
Figure 6: Lower Housing Base Support

NOTES
Figure 7: Lower Housing Base Support Section
Note:
In this figure, the sketched centerline is aligned to the
silhouette edge of the cylindrical surface of the base feature.
5. Add a revolved cut feature to the model as shown in the following

figure. Regardless of how the base feature changes in depth, the
wall thickness should remain 2.5.
Figure 8: Lower Housing Revolved Cut

NOTES
6. Cut away part of the front housing, as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 9: Lower Housing Cut
7. Add a 30-diameter hole feature at the rear of the housing as shown

in the Lower Housing dimensions at the beginning of this section.
After you have finished, save the model and erase the part from
memory.

NOTES
SECTION 3: Creating the Snap Ring Part

The snap ring part is purchased directly from a supplier, so it does not
need a flexible design. You can create it with only two features.
Figure 10: Snap Ring Dimensions
1. Create a part named snap_ring.prt.
2. Create a solid feature by extruding the outline of the snap ring, as

shown in the following figure. The part has a thickness of 1.5mm
Figure 11: Snap Ring Section

NOTES
3. Add a 2-radius simple edge round as indicated. After you have

finished, save and erase the model.
Round these
edges.
Figure 12: Snap Ring Rounds

P a g e B-1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
SECTION 4: Creating the Upper Housing Part

According to the design intent of the upper housing part, the diameter of
the base feature relates to all the other features. You place the discharge on
the model symmetrically back-to-front. You use a swept feature to create a
portion of the model geometry that represents the housing, centering the
sweep about the base feature. By extruding the base feature on both sides
of the sketching plane, you can avoid having to create an additional datum
plane later. To complete the housing discharge geometry, you create a
blend feature to incorporate the widening characteristic of the discharge
housing.
Figure 13: Upper Housing Dimensions
1. Create a part named upper_housing.prt.
2. Extrude a 120-diameter semicircle to a depth of 80. Extrude on

both sides of the sketching plane so that you can use the same
sketching plane for the trajectory of the discharge housing.
3. Use a swept protrusion with the Free Ends attribute to create a

portion of the housing discharge as shown in the first following
figure. Make the trajectory of the sweep a line and arc, giving it a

Appendix B P a g e B-1 1
NOTES
distance of 81.5 from the end of the line to the center of the
housing, and assigning a radius of 100 to the arc. Ensure that the
sweep remains attached to the base feature at this location,
regardless of the diameter of the base feature, by aligning the
endpoint of the arc to both the cylindrical and planar surfaces of
the base feature (see the second following figure). Locate the start
point of the trajectory at the end of the line (notice the centerlines
in the third following figure). Create the cross-section as a
rectangle.
Trajectory
Section
Figure 14: Completed Sweep
Start point Trajectory
Figure 15: Sweep Trajectory Section

NOTES
Centerlines (provided by
system)
Figure 16: Sweep Section
4. Create a straight parallel blend to complete the discharge of the

housing. Use only two sections with a depth of 57.5 for Section 2.
Create Section 1 of the blend using the edge of the sweep. (Hint:
Use a centerline to denote symmetry in Sketcher).

NOTES
Figure 17: Blend Sections
5. Your part should look like the following figure.
Figure 18: Blend Complete
6. Create a simple, edge chain round with a radius of 15. Your part
should look as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Pick this edge for the

tangent chain of the
40 radius Pick this edge
for the 5
radius
Figure 19: Upper Housing Rounds
7. To improve airflow, create a simple edge round with a radius value

of 40.
8. Create another simple edge round with a radius of 5. As references,

pick the edges where the swept protrusion intersects the first solid
feature, as shown in the previous figure.
Remove two hidden surfaces

for the shell feature.
Figure 20: Shell References
9. Create a shell feature. Remove these two surfaces as references:

the end surface of the discharge diffuser (planar surface of the
blended feature), and the bottom flat surface of the first solid
feature. Specify a value of 2.5 for the shell thickness.
10. Add a 04.1-thick bolting flange, as shown in the following figure.

Make this feature similar to the flange on the motor part.

NOTES
11. Make a 97.5-diameter cut in the front of the housing, as shown in

Flange
Hole Detail
Figure 21: Upper Housing Flange and Cut
12. Make a 30-diameter hole in the back of the housing. If an axis

exists in the model, create a coaxial hole. If the model does not
have an axis, create a datum axis.
Note:
To create a datum axis choose Insert , Datum , A x i s, Thru
Cylinder and select the cylindrical surface of the base
protrusion. You will learn more about datum axis in a later
chapter.

NOTES
Figure 22: Upper Housing
13. Add a straight hole, as shown in Detail A of the Upper Housing

dimensions at the beginning of this section. After you have
finished, save the model and erase it from memory.

NOTES
CREATING ASSEMBLIES
To complete the parts for these assemblies, you modify the parts, create
new features, and add relations in both Part and Assembly modes.
Although the models are not complete, you also start creating
production drawings and assemblies. As you complete this project, you
can observe the associativity between the part, assembly, and drawing
files.
Note:
You should attempt to use the models that you completed from
the previous project lab. When creating these assemblies and
production drawings, you can either use the models that you
created previously or the models that are stored in a library
which reflect the model at the end of the previous project. The
stored models are indicated in parenthesis ( ).
SECTION 1: Creating the Motor Assembly

In keeping with the design intent of the motor assembly, you must fully
constrain all part models into the assembly. The motor part must be placed
as the first component. In this portion of the project, you only change the
motor part in Part mode.
Figure 23: Exploded View of Completed Motor Assembly
1. Create an assembly named motor.asm.

NOTES
2. Assemble the motor part you created in the previous project lab (or
beta_motor.prt) to the default assembly datum planes. After
placing it in the assembly, turn off the datum planes to make it
easier to place the remaining component.
3. Assemble the motor shaft part (beta_shaft.prt) into the assembly

(see the following two figures).
Figure 24: Motor Shaft Assembled into Motor
Align inside surface of

revolved cut of motor shaft
with back surface of motor.
Figure 25: Alignment References for Motor Shaft
4. Create another snap ring groove in the shaft so that it does not slide
into the motor. Retrieve the motor shaft part (beta_shaft.prt) in a
separate window.
5. Pattern the first snap ring groove to create a second one 141.8 from
the leader, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 26: Patterning the Groove
6. Save and close the shaft part model.
7. Open the motor assembly. Note that the snap ring groove now
appears in the shaft.
8. Assemble snap_ring.prt (beta_ring.prt) into the shaft groove

(revolved cut) of motor shaft.
9. Assemble the motor cover (beta_cover.prt) to the motor part. Only

create parent child references between the motor part and the
cover.
10. Create an assembly pattern to assemble the second snap ring into
the assembly using “ref pattern.”
11. Turn the datum planes back on.

NOTES
Figure 27: Motor Assembly
12. Note that the patterned snap ring groove is positioned too far down
on the shaft. Modify the offset of the patterned grove in the motor
shaft part (beta_shaft.prt). Change the distance to 127.5 and
Regenerate.

NOTES
SECTION 2: Concurrent Design of the Motor

Housing
At this point in the design process the motor housing and most other
assembly components have not been completed. You can work
concurrently between assemblies and parts in Pro/ENGINEER. To prepare
the motor for mounting holes, create a set of holes in the motor to match
the ones that you are going to create in the cover.
1. Open the motor part (beta_motor.prt). Add a hole at an angle using

radial placement. When prompted for the dimensioning scheme,
use a radial dimension.
2. Create a radial pattern using three instances. When you have

finished, save the model and close the window.
Create this
hole first
Figure 28: Radial Pattern of Holes in the Motor

NOTES
SECTION 3: Creating the Blower Assembly

According to the design intent of this assembly, you use the lower housing
as the base component and assemble everything to it. As you place
components into the assembly, you will find that several features are
missing. Create these features using the Modify in Assembly mode.
1. Create an assembly named blower.asm.
2. Assemble lower_housing.prt (beta_lower.prt) to the three default

assembly datum planes.
3. The lower housing was created without any holes in the mounting
flange. Modifying the part at assembly level, create the hole in
lower housing and pattern it in Assembly mode. Create a straight
hole on the flange with the dimensioning scheme shown in the
following figure.
Note:
Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the hole. In the
next task, you use Pattern from the same menu.
Figure 29: Hole Dimension

NOTES
4. Pattern the hole for a total of four (4) instances including the
original. If you exited the FEATURE menu, choose Modify , Mod
Part . Select the lower housing; then choose Feature .
Note:
Do not exit the FEATURE menu after creating the pattern. In
the next task, you use Copy from the same menu.
5. According to the design intent, you should mirror the flange along
with the pattern of holes to the other side of the model (as shown in
the following figure).
Offset from this

surface for the
blower .
Mirror
plane
Mirror protrusion
and holes
Figure 30: Mirror References
6. Assemble the blower that part you completed in the “Patterns and
Feature Copying” lesson. (If you did not finish the model, use the
part called beta_blower in the current directory.) Use a mate offset
command with an offset value of 1 to place it with respect to the
back of the lower housing. Exit the part modification menus.
7. View the obvious interference between lower housing and blower

by shading the model. Change the dimension for the blower fins
from 73.5 to 65.0 and regenerate the part.
8. Assemble the upper housing part (beta_upper.prt) to the lower

housing. Fully constrain the component by mating the flange
surfaces, aligning the central axis, and aligning the front faces on
both components.

NOTES
9. The upper housing does not have a pattern of mounting holes on

the flange. Open the part so that you can make the changes in Part
mode in its own window.
10. Create the four holes by patterning them with an increment of 20.
11. Use Copy , Mirror to create the bolt flange and holes on the other
side of the base feature.
Mirror protrusion
and holes.
Figure 31: Upper Housing Copy Command
12. Save the part file and close the window. Activate the assembly
window. Note that the assembly now reflects the changes that you
made in Part mode. Save the assembly and erase the window.

NOTES
SECTION 4: Creating the Motor Part Drawing

Although you have not completely finished the motor part, you now begin
creating the production drawings. In the drawing, the views and
dimensions update with changes to the part model regardless of whether
you made the changes in Part, Assembly, or Drawing mode. In this portion
of the project, you set up the drawing views only; you do the detailing
later.
1. Create a drawing named motor.drw.
2. Use a C-size sheet and associate motor.prt (beta_motor.prt) with

the drawing.
FOURTH VIEW
FIFTH VIEW SIXTH VIEW
SECOND VIEW FIRST VIEW THIRD VIEW
Figure 32: Placement of Views for Motor Drawing
3. Add the first general view. Orient it to a side view of the motor
model using the default datum planes. Use No Scale to allow
Pro/ENGINEER to determine the scale of the drawing.
4. Add the front projected view, labeled as the second view in the
previous figure.
5. Add the back projected view, labeled as the third view in the
previous figure.

NOTES
6. Add the top projected view, labeled as the fourth view in the
previous figure.
7. Add the cross-section view, labeled as the fifth view in the

previous figure.
8. Add sixth view as a general view with a scale of 0.75.
9. Change the display mode of the views. For the first, third, and fifth
views, change the display mode to Hidden line , Tan Phantom .
10. Change the display mode of the remaining views to No Hidden,

No Disp Tan.
Note:
Once you set a view using Display Mode , it remains at that
setting even if you change the Environment setting.
11. Save the drawing.
12. Create a drawing named motor_asm.drw.
13. Use a C-size sheet and associate the MOTOR.ASM model to the
drawing using the dialog box.
FOURTH VIEW
SECOND VIEW THIRD VIEW
FIRST VIEW
Figure 33: Placement of Views for the Motor Assembly Drawing
14. Place the first general view. Choose No Scale .

NOTES
15. Place the second projection view.
16. Place the third projection view.
17. Place the fourth projection view.
18. Change the display mode of all of the views to No Hidden, No

Disp Tan. When you have finished, save the model and erase all.

NOTES
INTERROGATING YOUR MODELS

For this project, you continue developing the models according to the
original design intent. You do this by adding features, analyzing mass
properties for individual parts and whole assemblies, and investigating
interference between components. You also write relations to prevent
interference between components. After completing these tasks, you place
the blower subassembly into the motor assembly.
The cover part is incomplete. According to the design intent, you must
create tabs to mount the cover to the motor part, and add cooling slots to
the top of the cover, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 34: Cover Modifications

NOTES
SECTION 1: Designing the Cover Part

1. Open the cover part.
Figure 35: Cover Part
2. To make it easier to create the slotted cuts representing cooling

slots, suppress the protrusion, hole, and round on top of the base
feature.
3. Add the first slot, as shown in Detail C of the cover modifications.
4. Pattern the slot for a total of seven (7) instances, including the
original.
5. Resume the suppressed features.
6. Note in the following figure, the system removed the underside of

the small cylindrical boss when you added the cooling fins. The
second protrusion was originally sketched on the inside of the base
feature. Reorder the cut and pattern after the first protrusion, and
note the difference on the model.

NOTES
Material is
removed due to
feature order.
Figure 36: X-Section of Cover Before Reorder
Reorder leaves
material in place.
Figure 37: X-Section of Cover after Reorder
7. Add a protrusion that you can pattern rotationally. For the

horizontal or vertical reference plane, use an internal datum at an
angle. You can then use the associated angle to pattern later.
Sketch the open section shown in the following figure. Extrude to a
depth of 5.0.

NOTES
Open section
Figure 38: Sketching open section
Angle from Make

Datum
Cylindrical
surface for axis
Figure 39: Rotational Pattern
8. Pattern the leader tab, incrementing the angle by 120 degrees.

Make a total of three instances, including the original.
9. Create a datum axis through the cylindrical surface of the leader

tab.
10. Reference pattern the datum axis.
11. Create a co-axial straight hole on the leader tab. Make the diameter
7.5.

NOTES
Figure 40: Cover Before Reference Pattern of Holes
12. Reference pattern the straight hole. When you have finished, save
the model.

NOTES
SECTION 2: Completing the Motor Part

You have now determined the final design of the base support for the
motor part. In this section of the project, you create a support foundation
on the cylindrical base feature.
Figure 41: Changes to the Motor Part
1. Open the motor part (gamma_motor.prt).
2. Suppress all features, except for the first solid protrusion and the
default datum planes.
3. Add a feature for the motor foundation, as shown in the following

figure (Hint: Use a section that will not fill the central hole when it
is resumed. An open section will also work).

NOTES
Figure 42: Motor Foundation
4. Resume all suppressed features.
5. Create a cut on the side of the electronics foundation, as shown in

Detail A of the changes to be made to the motor part. Pattern the
cut to include four (4) instances, including the original.
Figure 43: Side Cut
6. Mirror the patterned cut features that are on the side of the
electronics foundation to the other side. After you have finished,
save the model and erase all.

NOTES
SECTION: 3: Completing the Blower Assembly

To finish the assembly, you measure interference and create an assembly
relation to prevent the blower part from interfering with the other
components. In addition, you also create a Bill of Materials (BOM) and
calculate the mass properties of the components in the assembly.
1. Open blower.asm (gamma_blower.asm).
2. Change the height of the blower parts (gamma_blower.prt) blade

from 65 depth to 73.5. Regenerate the assembly.
3. Measure the interference between the members of the blower

assembly. Use the Model Analysis… option in the Analysis pull-
down menu. Select Global Interference from the Type drop-down
list in the dialog box. Choose the defaults shown in the following
figure. Toggle the results of the models by clicking on the arrows
in the dialog box.
Toggle
between
Figure 44: Modal Analysis Dialog Box

NOTES
4. Explode the assembly model so that you can see inside the model.
Click Modify , Mod Explode to change the position of the blower
using a normal plane, as shown in the following figure.
Select this
surface to
define the
normal
Select these
direction
two surfaces
Figure 45: Exploding the Assembly
5. Determine the distance that can be used for the blower. Measure
the distance from the back inside surface of the blower to the front
inside surface of the blower using Analysis, Measure , Distance
and selecting the surfaces shown in the previous figure. Remember
the distance value.
6. Modify the blade height again on the blower so it will fit within the
lower housing of the model. Change the blade length to be the
distance you just measured minus the thickness of the top and base
of the blower and a clearance. At the current values the distance is
equal to 75 – (5 + 2.5 + 5) or 62.5.
7. Develop a relation that drives the blower to always be centered

within the lower housing by driving the offset value. Use the
parameters shown in the next figure.

NOTES
BLOWER PART LOWER_HOUSING PART
Figure 46: Symbolic Dimensions for Assembly Relations
8. Note that the lower housing part does not have any dimensions that
control the inside dimension of the interior opening. According to
the design intent, you must control the wall thickness. This intent
was captured by driving the revolved cut off the dimension of 2.5
(shown as d8:0, d10:0, and d9:0 in the previous figure) from all the
edges of the surface of the model.
9. Create a number parameter in the lower housing part. Open the

lower housing (or the gamma_lower.prt) part in a sub-window.
Choose Relations and pick the revolved cut and base protrusion to
show their symbolic dimensions.
10. Write a relation that is equal to the length of the cut (cut_length =
d1 – (d8+ d10)). Remember to use symbolic dimensions. Enter the
parameter name in the relation to automatically create a number
parameter in the model.

NOTES
11. Save lower_housing.prt (or the gamma_lower.prt) and close the

window. Activate the assembly window again.
12. Create another parameter in the blower model that represents the
overall height of the blower including the base, blade and top.
Open the blower part (or gamma_blower.prt) in another window.
Add the following relation, height = d1+d9+d18, to automatically
create the parameter height.
13. Save the blower and close the window.
14. Drive the offset of the blower model within the lower housing so
that they are equally offset. Enter a relation similar to d0:1 =
(cut_length:0 - height:2)/2.
15. Regenerate the model. Check the message area to see if the system
displayed a warning; you may have to regenerate twice, depending
on the order in which you added the relations. (Hint: Use Sort
R e l s.)
16. Click Analysis > Model Analysis to calculate the mass properties
of the assembly. Add the density values of your choice to the
components. (example 7.63e-9 tonne/mm3 for steel)
17. Use the Info menu to create a BOM. When you have finished, save
the model.

NOTES
SECTION 4: Completing the Motor Assembly

In this portion of the project, you complete the motor assembly by
constraining the blower assembly into the motor assembly. You also
examine the difference between blanking layers in an assembly and
suppressing components using the Model Tree tool. While suppressing
components, the system places you into the Resolve Environment because
component references are missing.
1. Open motor.asm (gamma_motor.asm).
2. Redefine the component constraints of the cover so that the mount

holes align with the motor holes. Add an alignment constraint. Pick
the axis on the first hole of the tabs on the cover, and the
appropriate axis on the motor.
3. Assemble blower.asm (gamma_blower.asm) into motor.asm (or

gamma_motor.asm). Use your own discretion when choosing the
constraints.
4. Change the column display of the Model Tree to show Status and
FeatID. List suppressed components by choosing View , Model
Tree Setup , and Item Display.
Figure 47: Model Tree for Motor Assembly
5. Create a layer at the top-level assembly called “base_comp.”

NOTES
6. Set all of the components (not the sub-assemblies) of the motor

part to the BASE_COMP layer.
7. Blank the BASE_COMP layer, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 48: Set Display Dialog Box
Note:
Note that the motor part is no longer visible in the working
window, but it is still listed in the Model Tree with the status
of Regenerated.
8. Unblank the BASE_COMP layer.
9. Suppress the motor component.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select an option for the child
components. However, you cannot reroute or redefine them
because they all reference the base component of the assembly.
10. Suspend all child components.

NOTES
Note:
Suspend is a temporary action; it only suspends components in
place until the next regeneration, which in this situation occurs
as soon as you choose Done/Return. This action causes the
assembly to fail.
11. The system places you into the Resolve Environment because the
child components have missing references. To exit the Resolve
Environment, select Quick Fix and Freeze for all of the
components. As soon as the system freezes one component,
another component causes you to remain in the Resolve
Environment because it is also missing references.
12. Once you have exited the Resolve Environment, review the
suppressed, frozen, and regenerated components listed in the
Status column of the Model Tree.
13. Resume the motor part. Note that all frozen components
automatically update in the Model Tree. Save the model and erase
all components.

NOTES
COMPLETING THE PROJECT

You are now ready to complete the project by finishing the parts,
assemblies, and drawings. After documenting the motor part and motor
assembly in production drawings, you review the associativity between all
three modes of Pro/ENGINEER.
Front
flange
Figure 49: Changes to Motor Part
SECTION 1: Developing the Motor Part

According to the design intent, you increase the width of the front flange
of the motor part and change the holes in the flange. You make these
changes in Part mode.
1. Open motor.prt (delta_motor.prt).
2. Change the thickness of the front flange to 15.
3. Delete the three holes on the front flange.
4. Create three sketched holes using a radial placement. The sketched

section is detailed in the next figure.

NOTES
Figure 50: Sketched Hole Section
Figure 51: The Completed Holes
5. Save the model and close the window.

NOTES
SECTION 2: Finishing the Lower Housing

According to the design intent, you strengthen the cylindrical wall of the
base feature by creating some ribs with draft features attached to them.
1. Open lower_housing.prt (delta_lower.prt). Build a rib between the

cylindrical base feature and the foundation base. See the figure
below for dimensions, and use Make Datum to create an offset
datum as the sketching plane taking care of the offset direction.
Single sketched
line
Datum offset
dimension
Figure 52: Rib Dimensions
2. Extract the body of the part from a mold. Create a draft feature on
the two parallel sides of the rib. Accept the default attributes of
Neutral Plane , No Split, and Constant . Create a neutral plane
through the top edge of the rib, parallel to the base surfaces. Use
the neutral plane as the reference plane. Enter [ -10] as the draft
angle.

NOTES
Draft surfaces
Figure 53: References for Draft Feature (surfaces meshed for clarity)
3. Copy the rib and draft features to create two supports. Use Move
and select the attribute of Dependent . Translate the features with
reference to the front of the model by a distance of 3.00
4. Mirror the ribs and draft features to the other side of the part. If the
mirroring operation fails because you cannot construct the
geometry, redefine the draft angle to -10 degrees. After you have
finished this task, save the model.
Mirror plane Copy these ribs

with the draft.
Figure 54: References for Copy of Rib and Draft Features

NOTES
SECTION 3: Completing the Drawing

To complete the motor assembly and part drawings, you must detail them.
In the part drawing all of the dimensions are feature dimensions. In the
assembly drawing, most of the dimensions exist at the component level;
the only assembly dimensions are those that you use for offset constraints.
Because the assembly dimensions assist in describing the part, they were
created in Drawing mode. After detailing the motor drawing, you modify
the feature dimensions to show the full associativity of all of the models.
1. Open motorasm.drw (delta_motor_asm.drw).
2. The system automatically places you into the Resolve

Environment. Read the prompt in the resolve window. The system
cannot place the cover because you deleted the holes from the
motor part earlier.
3. Use the Quick Fix option to redefine the placement constraints.

Change the missing reference for the assembly to the axis of the
sketched hole that you created earlier.
4. Detail the drawing as shown in the following figure, and add the
ISO view in the corner. Keep in mind that most of the dimensions
were created in Drawing mode. After you have finished the task,
save the drawing and close the window.
Figure 55: Assembly Drawing.
5. Open motor.drw (delta_motordrw.drw if you did not complete the

motor part or drawing from the previous project lab). Notice how

NOTES
the features you added to the motor part have automatically been
added to the drawing.
Figure 56: The Original Motor Drawing
6. Add additional views, change the default scale to 0.7, and move
the additional views to an added sheet on the drawing. Detail the
drawing according to the next two figures. When you have
finished, save the model.
Figure 57: Sheet 1 of the Motor Drawing

NOTES
Figure 58: Sheet 2 of the Motor Drawing
7. Notice that the axis circle does not appear around the patterned
holes on the flange. Change the setup file in the drawing so that
radial_pattern_axis_circle is set to YES . Then show the axis of
the patterned holes.
Figure 59: Pattern Axis Circle

NOTES
8. Modify the dimensions of the motor part (delta_motor.prt)

foundation in the drawing so that its depth is 7.5. Regenerate the
model. Retrieve the motor part into session and examine the
changes to the part.
Copy this protrusion

translated from this
surface
Figure 60: The Modified Base
9. Create a dependant copy of the base using the move option

translated 60 units from the surface, as shown in the preceding
figure. Add another protrusion to cap of the base with the
dimensions shown in the following figure.
Figure 61: The Completed Base

NOTES
10. Open the motor assembly (delta_motor.asm) and examine the

changes to the assembly. Finally, retrieve motor drawing and
notice how the changes are reflected. Save the drawing, assembly,
and parts by saving the assembly drawing.
11. Erase the models from memory and close Pro/ENGINEER.
12. Congratulations!

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - $SSHQGL[
8VLQJWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
,QWKLVPRGXOH\RXOHDUQKRZWRFRPSOHWHD3UR),&,(1&<
(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQW
2EMHFWLYHV
$IWHUFRPSOHWLQJWKLVPRGXOH\RXZLOOEHDEOHWR
• 6WDUW3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUDQGORJLQ
• &RPSOHWHDVVLJQHGDVVHVVPHQWV
• 9LHZ\RXUDVVHVVPHQWUHVXOWV
3DJH&
127(6
7(&+12/2*<%$6('/($51,1*#37&
37&7HFKQRORJ\EDVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQV7%/6DUHLQWHQGHGWR
FRPSOHPHQWRXULQVWUXFWRUOHGWUDLQLQJ7%/6DUHDQLPSRUWDQWDGMXQFWWR
WUDGLWLRQDOLQVWUXFWRUOHGWUDLQLQJEHFDXVH
• 7KHSUHYDOHQFHRI³YLUWXDOWHDPV´LQPRVWFRPSDQLHVKDVOHGWR
GLVWULEXWHGZRUNJURXSVWKDWUHTXLUH³MXVWLQWLPH´WUDLQLQJ²
XVXDOO\LQPRUHWKDQRQHORFDWLRQVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
• (PSOR\HHVH[SHFWKLJKTXDOLW\³HOHDUQLQJ´WREHDYDLODEOHDORQJ
ZLWKPRVWDGYDQFHGSURGXFWGHVLJQWRROVVXFKDV3UR(1*,1((5
• (PSOR\HHVH[SHFWDQGQHHGRSSRUWXQLWLHVWROHDUQQHZVNLOOVERWK
WRPDLQWDLQH[LVWLQJSURILFLHQFLHVDQGDOVRIRUSURIHVVLRQDO
JURZWK
• 7LPHFRQVWUDLQWVZKLFKDUHRIWHQPRUHUHVWULFWLYHWKDQEXGJHWDU\
OLPLWDWLRQVRIWHQGLFWDWHZKHWKHURQHFDQSDUWLFLSDWHLQWUDLQLQJ
RSSRUWXQLWLHV7KHDELOLW\WRSDUWLFLSDWHLQWUDLQLQJGXULQJ
XQFRQYHQWLRQDOKRXUVDQGIURPWKHXVHU¶VGHVNWRSFDQEHDPDMRU
EHQHILW
,QWRGD\
VZHEHQDEOHGHFRQRP\PRVWSURGXFWGHYHORSPHQWFRPSDQLHV
ZDQWWRWDNHDGYDQWDJHRIQHZWHFKQRORJ\WRLQFUHDVHSURGXFWLYLW\DQG
UHVSRQGWRG\QDPLFPDUNHWFRQGLWLRQV6LPXOWDQHRXVO\ZRUNIRUFH
WUDLQLQJPXVWUHPDLQFXUUHQWZLWKWKHQHZWHFKQRORJ\37&7HFKQRORJ\
EDVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQVDUHGHVLJQWRKHOS\RXDFKLHYHWKLVJRDO
7KH37&7%/6SURGXFWSRUWIROLRFRQVLVWVRIWKUHHNH\FRPSRQHQWV
• 3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
• 3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ:HE/HVVRQV
• 3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ:HE&RXUVHV
3UR),&,(1&<(9$/8$725
%\XVLQJ37&¶V3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJPHWKRGRORJ\GXULQJWKHFODVV\RXFDQ
DVVHVV\RXUFRPSUHKHQVLRQRIWKHFRXUVHPDWHULDOVZLWKWKH
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVGHVLJQHGWRDGGUHVVDJURZLQJGHPDQG
IURPRXUFXVWRPHUVIRUDWRROWKDWFDQDFFXUDWHO\DVVHVVWKHVNLOOVRIWKH
37&SURGXFWXVHUV:HIRXQGWKDWERWKXVHUVDQGWKHLUPDQDJHUVZDQWWR
PHDVXUHSURILFLHQF\

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUHQDEOHVXVHUVWRXQGHUVWDQGZKHUHWKH\FDQ
LPSURYHWKHLURZQDELOLWLHV,WKHOSVPDQDJHUVXQGHUVWDQGKRZWKH\FDQ
RSWLPL]HWHDPGHYHORSPHQWDQGDOVRPD[LPL]HWKHLUWUDLQLQJEXGJHW
UHWXUQRQLQYHVWPHQW52,
$66(660(17&5,7(5,$
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVGHVLJQHGWRIDLUO\DQGDFFXUDWHO\DVVHVV
WKHXVHUV¶VNLOOV2XUDVVHVVPHQWPHWKRGRORJ\PHHWVRUH[FHHGVLQGXVWU\
VWDQGDUGVIRUREMHFWLYHDVVHVVPHQWWRROV
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUGHYHORSPHQWSURFHVVLVEDVHGRQWKH
IROORZLQJ
• 7KHTXHVWLRQVDQGSHUIRUPDQFHSUREOHPH[HUFLVHVDUHUHODWHGGLUHFWO\
WRWKHVRIWZDUHIHDWXUHVDQGIXQFWLRQV
• 7KHDVVHVVPHQWJUDGLQJDOJRULWKPLVDXWRPDWHGWKHUHLVQRVXEMHFWLYH
FRPSRQHQWWRWKHJUDGLQJSURFHVV
• $QREMHFWLYHWKLUGSDUW\UHYLHZDQGDSSURYDOSURFHVVIROORZLQJVWULFW
JXLGHOLQHVIRUHPSOR\HHHYDOXDWLRQ
$OHWWHUIURPDWKLUGSDUW\ODZILUPGHOLYHULQJWKHLURSLQLRQRQWKHH[WHQW
WRZKLFKWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUFRPSOLHVZLWK8QLWHG6WDWHV(TXDO
2SSRUWXQLW\(PSOR\PHQWODZVDQGUHJXODWLRQVLVDYDLODEOHRQRXUZHE
VLWH0RUHLQIRUPDWLRQLVDYDLODEOHIURPWKH7%/6JDWHZD\SDJH7KH
7%/6JDWHZD\SDJHLVGLVSOD\HGZKHQ\RXORJLQWR3UR),&,(1&<
(YDOXDWRU
)RUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQSOHDVHYLVLW
www.ptc.com/services/edserv/proficiency.htm

3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
127(6
/$%25$725<35$&7,&$/
*RDO
,QWKLVODERUDWRU\\RXVWDUW3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUFRPSOHWHDQ
DVVHVVPHQWDQGYLHZWKHUHVXOWV
0HWKRG
,Q([HUFLVH\RXWDNHDQ(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQWDQGYLHZWKHUHVXOWV
(;(5&,6(&RPSOHWLQJ(YDOXDWRU$VVHVVPHQWV
7DVN /RJRQWR7%/6
,QWKHEURZVHUW\SH>http://www-ed.ptc.com/Evaluator/@
DGGUHVVDUHD
7KH7HFKQRORJ\%DVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQV7%/6JDWHZD\SDJH

GLVSOD\V
)LJXUH7%/6*DWHZD\3DJH

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
6HOHFWWKH7%/6/RJRQ LFRQ
$WWKHQH[WVFUHHQW\SHWKH8VHU1DPH DQG3DVVZRUG SURYLGHG

E\\RXULQVWUXFWRULQWKHDSSURSULDWHILHOGVDQGWKHQFOLFNWKH
/RJRQ LFRQ
7DVN 7DNHWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUH[DP
<RXUXVHULQIRUPDWLRQLVGLVSOD\HGDWWKHWRSRIWKHVFUHHQ6FUROO
GRZQWRWKHVHFWLRQODEHOHG3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
$VVHVVPHQWV
)LJXUH7DNLQJDQ([DP
6HOHFW6$03/((;$0IURPWKHGURSGRZQOLVWDQGFOLFNWKH
7DNH([DP LFRQ
$WWKHERWWRPRIWKH86(5$*5((0(17VFUHHQFOLFN$JUHH 7KH

ILUVWPXOWLSOHFKRLFHTXHVWLRQGLVSOD\V
3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
127(6
7RDQVZHUDTXHVWLRQVHOHFWWKHFLUFOHQH[WWRWKHGHVLUHGDQVZHU
DQGWKHQFOLFNWKH6XEPLWIRU*UDGLQJ LFRQ
$QVZHUDOOWKHPXOWLSOHFKRLFHTXHVWLRQVLQWKHVDPHIDVKLRQ
7DVN 'RZQORDGWKHSHUIRUPDQFHEDVHGWHVW
6HOHFWWKH*RWR3HUIRUPDQFH%DVHG4XL]]HV OLQN
5HYLHZWKHGUDZLQJRIWKHVKDIW1RWHWKHOHQJWKRIWKHVKDIWLV
UHTXLUHGWREH250
7DVN /RDGWKHVKDIWSDUWLQWR(9$/8$725IRUJUDGLQJ
,Q3UR),&,(1&<(9$/8$725FOLFNWKH%URZVH LFRQDQG

ORFDWH0$67(5B6+$)7357 IURP\RXUZRUNLQJGLUHFWRU\
&OLFNWKH6XEPLWIRU*UDGLQJ LFRQ
7DVN &RPSOHWHWKH(9$/8$725WHVW
&OLFNWKH)LQLVK7HVW LFRQWRFRPSOHWHWKH(9$/8$725H[DP
7DVN 9LHZWKHUHVXOWV
$VFUHHQGLVSOD\VWKHUHVXOWVRIWKHH[DP,WSURYLGHV\RXURYHUDOO
VFRUHDQGDWDEOHRIWKHUHVXOWVIRUHDFKVHFWLRQDQGVXEVHFWLRQ$
VHFWLRQFRQWDLQVTXHVWLRQVRQDFRUHWRSLFVXFKDV0RGHOLQJRU
'UDZLQJ$VXEVHFWLRQFRQWDLQVTXHVWLRQVRQVXEWRSLFVVXFKDV
5HODWLRQVRUURXQGIHDWXUHV
7KHQH[WVHFWLRQOLVWVHYHU\TXHVWLRQLQWKHH[DP$JUHHQ
FKHFNPDUNLQGLFDWHVDFRUUHFWDQVZHU$UHG;LQGLFDWHVDQ
LQFRUUHFWDQVZHU
7RFORVHWKH7%/6FOLFNWKH LFRQ

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
02'8/(6800$5<
,QWKLVPRGXOH\RXOHDUQHGWKDW
• +RZWRWDNHD3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQW
• +RZWRYLHZWKHUHVXOWVRIDFRPSOHWHGH[DP

3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
Appendix
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - D

Using PTC Help
You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER
information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed
information on selected topics.
Objectives
• Start PTC Help.

• Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.
• Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.
Page D-1
NOTES
PTC HELP OVERVIEW

PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into
Pro/ENGINEER.
PTC Help Features

PTC Help offers:
• A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searching

capability
• Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click of
the mouse
• Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software
• Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes
Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database ,

which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more
information, see the Technical Support Appendix.
USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP

Launching Help: Four Methods
There are four procedures for launching the help system.
1. Main Menu
This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete
with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system
speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system.
Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the
following figure.

P a g e D-2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Figure 1 Starting PTC Help
The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser

window.
Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help
In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree
structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access sub-
topics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions,
explanations, and tips.

Using PTC Help P a g e D-3
NOTES
2. Context-Sensitive Help
1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.
2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window

about which you want an explanation.
3. A browser window opens that explains the topic.
4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the

toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon
functionality.
Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help
5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See
Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that
may be of immediate interest.

NOTES
6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.
Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics
3. Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager
1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. Click any menu command from the menu manager.
3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links

that explain the menu command.
4. Click the topic you want to read.
5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu

manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list
of two useful topics.

NOTES
Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager
4. Vertical Menu Commands
1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP

window appears.
Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager

NOTES
PTC HELP MODULES

There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents:
Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and
Using Additional Modules.
Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System
Refer to the following list to find a particular module in the table of

contents:
Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help

Appendix
E
PTC Global Services: Technical Support
PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance
to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we
also offer Web-based assistance to fit your individual needs by
providing 24 hour / 7 day availability.
PTC Global Services is committed to continually improving customer
service. Through our Quality Monitoring Program we have
demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO
9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.
Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
• Open a Technical Support Call.

• Register for on-line Technical Support.
• Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base.
• Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.
Page E-1
NOTES
FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE

Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to
www.ptc.com/support/support.htm.
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail
Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.com with copen as the e-mail subject.
Please use the following format (or download the template from
www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm):
FNAME: First Name

LNAME: Last Name
CALLCENTER: U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or
Tokyo
PHONE: NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN
CONFIG_ID: NNNNNN
PRODUCT: X
MODULE: XX
PRIORITY: X
DESC_BEGIN:
description starts
description continues
description ends
DESC_END

P a g e E- 2 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone

Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for
your Local Technical Support Center).
The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following
information when logging a call:
• Your PTC software Configuration ID

• Your name and telephone number
• The PTC product (module) name
• Priority of the issue
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web

You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical
Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL
LOGGER
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support

To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the
instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm.
When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical
Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party
vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure
Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.

Customer Support Information P a g e E- 3
NOTES
Routing Your Technical Support Calls
Call
Customer question
Telephone Call Web Call
Tech SupportEngineer Call is automatically created

creates a call in the database in the database
Investigation Call Back and Investigation
Support Engineer
solves issue or
reports it
to Development (SPR)
SPR
Software Performance Report
SPR fixed from Development
Software Performance Report (SPR)
SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer
Update CD to customer

NOTES
Technical Support Call Priorities

• Extremely Critical – Work stopped
• Critical – Work severely impacted
• Urgent – Work impacted
• Not Critical
• General Information
Software Performance Report Priorities

• Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a work
stoppage.
• High – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a
practical alternative technique is not available.
• Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a
practical alternative technique is available.
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT

Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online , to open the
registration form and enter your Configuration ID.
To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About

Pro/ENGINEER .
Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your

personal data. Please write down your username and password for future
reference.

NOTES
ONLINE SERVICES
After you have registered, you will have full access to all Online Tools.
You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online
Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs
(SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the
Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified
automatically.
Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and

electronic order of software and manuals are available.
The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software
updates for any PTC product.
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE

The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents.
Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs),
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer up-
to-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and
Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.

NOTES
Terminology used by Technical Support

TAN – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that
may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue.
TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue
working.
TPI – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information

about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to
document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer
calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.
Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including

screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.
FAQ – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most

commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support
database.

NOTES
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION

To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to
www.ptc.com/support.
1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications >

Knowledge Base Monitor .
2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get
information.
3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can
help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.
Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up

NOTES
CONTACT INFORMATION
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic
Services.
These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
Web:
• www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support)
• www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)
E-mail:
• cs_ptc@ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data)

• cs-webmaster@ptc.com (for comments or suggestions about
the Customer Service Web site)
FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):
• ftp.ptc.com
Technical Support Customer Feedback Line

The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service
concerns that are not technical product issues.
E-mail:
• cs-feedback@ptc.com
Telephone:
• www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm

NOTES
Telephone
For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted
in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone
and Fax Information sections below.
PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North

America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone
access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local
languages.
North America Phone Information

Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management,
and Documentation Requests):
Within the United States and Canada:
• 800-477-6435
Outside the United States and Canada:
• 781-370-5332
• 781-370-5513
Maintenance:
• 888-782-3774
Education:
• 888-782-3773

P a g e E- 1 0 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
NOTES
Europe Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Austria 0800 29 7542

Belgium 0800-15-241 (French)
0800-72567 (Dutch)
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117092
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 0180-2245132
49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of
Germany)
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Israel 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew)
177-150-21-34 (English only)
Italy 800-79-05-33
Luxembourg 0800-23-50
Netherlands 0800022-4519
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
South Africa 0800-991068
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 0800-55-38-33 (French)
0800-83-75-58 (Italian)
0800-552428 (German)
United Kingdom 0800-318677
License Management Phone Numbers:
Belgium 0800-75376
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117-092
Eastern Europe 44 1252 817 078

Customer Support Information P a g e E- 1 1
NOTES
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-0
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Italy 39 (0) 39-65651
Netherlands 0800-022-0543
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
Russia 44 1252 817 078
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44
United Kingdom 0800-31-8677
Education Services Phone Numbers:
Benelux 31-73-644-2705
France 33-1-69-33-65-50
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-325
Italy 39-039-65-65- 652
39-039-6565-1
Spain/Portugal 34-91-452-01-00
Sweden 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo)
46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby)
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-820-00-80
United Kingdom 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK)
44-1252-817-140
Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Australia 1800-553-565
China* 10800-650-8185 (international toll free)
108-657 (manual toll free)
Hong Kong 800-933309
India* 000-6517

NOTES
Indonesia 001-803-65-7250
7-2-48-55-00-35
Japan 120-20-9023
Malaysia 1-800-80-1026
New Zealand 0800-44-4376
Philippines 1800-1-651-0176
Singapore 65-830-9899
South Korea 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free)
080-3469-001 (domestic toll free)
Taiwan 0080-65-1256 (international toll free)
080-013069 (domestic toll free)
Thailand 001-800-65-6213
*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with
the respective string:
China MTF8309729
India MTF8309752
The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support
Center.
License Management Phone Numbers
Japan 81 (0) 3-3346-8280

Hong Kong (852) 2802-8982
Education Services Phone Numbers
Australia 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney)

61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne)
China 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou)
86-21-62785080 (Shanghai)
86-10-65908699 (Beijing)
Hong Kong 852-28028982
India 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore)
91-11-6474701 (New Delhi)
91-226513152 (Mumbai)

Customer Support Information P a g e E- 1 3
NOTES
Japan 81-3-3346- 8268

Malaysia 03-754 8198
Singapore 65-8309866
South Korea 82-2-3469-1080
Taiwan 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei)
886-4-3103311 (Taichung)
886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
Up-to-Date + Worldwide = Maximum
Information ISO 9000 Productivity
Certification with
Quality Control
PTC
System
Products

INDEX
Assemblies Design Intent, 21-2
Constraining Components, 13-3 Assemblies, 13-8
Design Intent, 13-8 Associativity, 21-4
Modifying, 13-7 Changing, 21-5
Options, 13-8 Design Criteria, 21-3
BOM, 13-8 Parent/Child Relationships, 21-3
Exploded Views, 13-9 Pro/NOTEBOOK, 21-2
Overview, 13-2 Dialog Boxes, 2-5
Placing Components, 13-6 General, 2-5
Surface Normal Vector, 13-2 Models, 2-6
Under-Constrained Components, 13-7 Option Buttons, 2-6
Associativity, 1-5 Dimensions
Behavioral Modeler Angular, 5-9
Achieving Desired Results, 10-6 Diameter, 5-7
Analyzing Effects of Parameter Changes, 10-6 Linear, 5-6
Components Modifying in Sketcher, 4-8
Analysis Features, 10-8 Radial, 5-8
Feasibility Studies, 10-11 Sections, 5-5
Field Points, 10-8 Display Area, 2-3
Optimization, 10-12 Drawings
Sensitivity Analysis, 10-10 Adding New Views, 11-2
User-defined Analysis, 10-9 Creating, 11-2
Creating Datum Geometry, 10-5 Cross Sections, 11-4
Creating Feature Parameters, 10-4 Detailing, 11-7
Creating New Measurement Systems, 10-5 Dimensions
Graph Matching, 10-7 Drawing Notes, 11-9
Interaction with Data Analysis Tools, 10-6 Driven, 11-8
Motion Analysis, 10-8 Features, 11-8
Behavioral Modeling Manipulating, 11-8
Applications, 10-4 Parametric Notes, 11-9
Definition, 10-2 Manipulating Views, 11-5
Features, 10-2 Templates, 11-6
Objective-Driven Design, 10-4 Applications, 11-6
Smart Models, 10-3 Customizing, 11-7
Config.PRO File, 20-2 View Type Menu, 11-3
Configuration Files Broken View, 11-3
Config.PRO, 20-2 Full View, 11-3
Editing, 20-3 Half View, 11-3
Mapkeys, 20-4 Partial View, 11-3
Order of Precedence, 20-3 Views
Constraints Auxiliary, 11-2
Sketcher Mode, 4-9 Detailed, 11-3
Copy General, 11-3
Choosing Features, 12-10 Projection, 11-2
Dependency Options, 12-11 Revolved, 11-3
Methods, 12-8 Edge, 4-9
Customizing Extruded Forms, 5-2
Pro/ENGINEER, 20-2 Feature-Based Models, 1-3
Deleting Files, 2-10 Features

INDEX P a g e -1
Copy To Locations, 12-8 Straight and Smooth Attributes, 8-5
Copying, 12-8 Tools, 8-4
File Commands Parameters
Closing Windows, 2-10 Symbols Used to Describe, 9-4
Deleting Files, 2-10 Parametric Features, 1-4
Saving Your Work, 2-9 Parametric Relations, 9-2
File Types, 2-4 Assembly, 9-2
Assemblies, 2-4 Design Changes, 9-8
Drawings, 2-4 Design Intent, 9-4
Parts, 2-4 Examples, 9-5
Sketches, 2-4 Feature, 9-3
Freeform Surfaces Order of Operations, 9-6
Applying to Engineering Models, 17-8 Part, 9-2
Blends and Transitions, 17-8 Pattern, 9-3
Parametric Controls, 17-7 Parent Features
Geometry Modifying, 7-3
Creating in Sketcher Mode, 4-6 Redefining, 7-4
Help, 2-8 Rerouting, 7-3
Hybrid Modeling, 17-3 Parent/Child Relationships
Information Definitions, 7-2
About Features, 19-2 Pick-and-Place Features, 7-2
Model Info, 19-2 Sketched Features, 7-2
Regeneration Info, 19-2 Patterns
Intent Manager, 4-3 Benefits of Using, 12-2
Interference, 19-3 Creating, 12-2
ISDX, 17-2 Options, 12-3
2-D Curves, 17-4 Rotational, 12-5
3-D Curves, 17-4 Types, 12-2
Creating Surfaces, 17-4 Dimensions, 12-2
Curves On Surface (COS), 17-6 Reference, 12-2
Style Models, 17-6 Preferences
Layout Mode, 21-2 Sketcher, 4-13
Macros Pro/ENGINEER
Mapkeys, 20-4 Customizing, 20-2
Mapkeys, 20-4 Pro/NOTEBOOK, 21-2
Mass Properties, 19-3 Problems
Calculating, 19-3 Diagnosing Regeneration Problems, 18-3
Measurement, 19-3 Reference Planes, 5-3
Menu Manager, 2-8 Default, 5-3
Menus, 2-2 Regeneration
Adding Mapkeys, 20-7 Model Info, 19-2
Customizing, 20-6 Regeneration Failures, 18-2
Message Area, 2-4 Resolve Environment, 18-2
Viewing Information, 2-4 Regeneration Problems
Model Tree, 2-7, 20-7 Feature Reorder, 7-6
General Usage, 20-8 Insert Mode, 7-6
Models Parent/Child Features, 7-5
Multiple Models, 2-8 Resolving, 7-5
Retrieving (Opening), 2-6 Resolve Environment
Sub-windows, 2-8 Diagnosing Problems, 18-3
Offset Edge, 4-10 Resolving, 18-2
Parallel Blends Specifying a Model, 18-3
Creating, 8-3 Starting, 18-2

P a g e -2 INDEX
Undoing Changes, 18-3 Associativity, 1-5
Resolve Environment:, 18-4 Core Concepts, 1-2
Reverse Styling, 17-9 Feature-Based Models, 1-3
Revolved Forms, 5-2 Parametric Features, 1-4
Saving Your Work, 2-9 Style
Sketched Features Creating Style Surfaces, 17-9
Cuts, 5-2 Features, 17-2
Defining, 5-2 Introduction, 17-2
Extruded and Revolved Forms, 5-2 Sweeps and Trajectories
Protrusions, 5-2 Creating, 8-2
Sketcher Templates
3-D Sketching, 4-13 Drawing Templates:, 11-6
Arcs, 4-6 Toolbar
Best Practices, 4-14 Customizing, 20-5
Circles, 4-6 Toolbars, 2-3
Constraints, 4-9 Top-Down Design, 14-2
Copying, 4-10 Approach, 14-2
Creating Geometry, 4-6 Benefits, 14-4
Customizing, 4-13 Characteristics, 14-3
Dimensioning, 4-7 Comparison with Traditional Approaches, 14-3
Intent Manager, 4-3 Pro/ENGINEER Tools, 14-7
Interface Features, 4-2 Process, 14-4
Lines, 4-6 Stages, 14-2
Menus, 4-4 Use Edge, 4-10
Mirroring, 4-11 User Interface, 2-2
Moving, 4-11 Dialog Boxes, 2-5
Points, 4-12 Display Area, 2-3
Pop-Up Menus, 4-3 Menus, 2-2
References, 4-5 Message Area, 2-4
Replacing, 4-11 Pro/ENGINEER, 2-2
Section Analysis, 4-11 Toolbars, 2-3
Selecting Sketched Entities, 4-3 Windows
Sketcher Mode, 4-4 Closing, 2-10
Tools, 4-9, 5-5
Trimming, 4-11
Sketching Planes, 5-3
Solid Modeling

INDEX P a g e -3
P a g e -2 INDEX

Intro Proe 320

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intro Proe 320

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PTC Global Services

Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Order Number DT-779-320-EN

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

• :HEEDVHGWUDLQLQJ :%7 FRXUVH

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Education Services Registration in North America

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

INTRODUCTION TO PRO/ENGINEER 1-1

THE PRO/ENGINEER INTERFACE 2-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

SKETCHER BASICS 4-1

SKETCHED FEATURES 5-1

DEFAULT DATUM TEMPLATES 6-1

PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPS 7-1

SWEEPS AND BLENDS 8-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

BEHAVIORAL MODELING 10-1

DRAWINGS AND DRAWING TEMPLATES 11-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

DUPLICATING FEATURES: PATTERNS AND COPY 12-1

CREATING ASSEMBLIES 13-1

PRINCIPLES OF TOP-DOWN DESIGN 14-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

ADDITIONAL DATUM FEATURES AND SKELETONS 15-1

LAYERS AND SUPPRESSION 16-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

CREATING SURFACES WITH FREEFORM 17-1

THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT 18-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

CONFIGURING PRO/ENGINEER 20-1

MODELING PHILOSOPHY 21-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

PROJECT LABORATORY B-1

USING THE PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR C-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT E-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

• Describe how to use Pro/ENGINEER as a solid modeling design

PRO/ENGINEER CORE CONCEPTS

Solid Modeling Benefits

• Solid models have volumes and surface areas.

1. Wireframe 2. Hidden Lines

Figure 1: Solid Model Display

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Designing Feature-based Models

Pro/ENGINEER enables you to build a model incrementally by adding

Creating models in Pro/ENGINEER involves incorporating your “design

Base Feature Protrusion Added Blind Cut Added Chamfers Added

Thru-All Cuts and Holes Added Chamfer Added Rounds Added

Figure 2: Building Models Feature by Feature

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Designing with Parametric Features

Parametric modeling has many advantages:

• Modifying dimensions can change model geometry.

Figure 3: Protrusion and Hole Follow Side of Block

• :HEEDVHGWUDLQLQJ:%7FRXUVH